2008 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle to
learn about the vehicle’s features and controls.
Pictures and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
Index
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Front Seats
The power lumbar
controls are located
on the outboard side
of the front seats.
Power Seats
The power seat
controls are located
on the outboard side
of the seats.
Press the lumbar control forward to increase support
and rearward to decrease support. Press the top
or bottom of the control to raise or lower the support
mechanism.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
The ignition does not need to be on for the power
lumbar feature to work.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the control up or down.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
The front seats also have power reclining seatbacks.
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can program
and recall memory settings for seat positions. See
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Massaging Lumbar
Heated and Cooled Seats
Your vehicle may have heated and cooled front seats.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the switch is
located on the outboard
side of the front seats
behind the lumbar switch.
Press the switch to
To operate the heated or cooled seats, the ignition
must be on.
The buttons are located
on the front doors.
turn the massaging
lumbar feature on.
The ignition must be on.
The massage cycle will run for up to 10 minutes.
To stop massage, press the massaging lumbar
switch again, or press the power lumbar switch.
Driver’s Side Buttons
Shown, Passenger’s
Side Buttons Similar
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on
the heated seatback.
H (Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn on the
cooled seat.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button
to turn on the heated seat and seatback.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press a button to turn on the desired feature. A light on
that button will display to show which feature is on.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel
There are three temperature settings for each feature.
A column of three lights next to the buttons will
display which setting the feature is in: high, medium
or low. Three lights indicate the highest setting,
two lights for medium and one light for the lowest
setting.
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at
the highest setting. Each time you press the button,
the feature will go down one temperature setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the display lights turn off.
The controls for this feature are located on the driver’s
door panel, and are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver’s seat, outside mirror,
and the steering wheel position if the vehicle has
the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature.
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front
heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it
is cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under
page 2-5. When the key is inserted into the ignition
and the ignition is turned on, this feature will turn off.
To turn it back on, press the desired button.
To save your positions in memory, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the steering wheel to a comfortable position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound
through the driver’s side front speaker to let you
know that the position has been stored.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A second seating, mirror, and steering wheel position
can be programmed by repeating the above steps
and pressing button 2 for a second driver.
Easy Exit Recall
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
To recall your memory positions, the vehicle must be
in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or
button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position.
The seat, outside mirrors, and steering wheel will
move to the position previously stored for the identified
driver. You will hear a single beep.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can
be recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear
a single beep. The driver’s seat will move back,
and if the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic
steering feature, the power telescopic steering column
will move up and forward.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature
is on, automatic seat and mirror movement will occur.
See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic
seat and power telescopic steering column movement
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at
any time, press one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power
mirror buttons.
Further programming for automatic seat and
steering wheel movement can be done using the
Driver Information Center (DIC). You can select or
not select the following:
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
steering column while recalling a memory position,
the driver’s seat and/or the steering column recall may
stop. If this happens remove the obstruction, then
press the appropriate control for the area that is not
recalling for two seconds. Try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling,
see your dealer for service.
• The easy exit recall feature
• The memory seat recall feature
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Your seats have power
reclining seatbacks.
Use the vertical power
seat control located
on the outboard side
of the seat.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward
the front of the vehicle.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
The height of all the head restraints can be adjusted.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise a front seat head
restraint, pull up on the
restraint. To lower it, press
the button, located on
the top of the seatback,
and push the head
Center Seat
restraint down.
To adjust the height of a rear seat head restraint, pull
up or push down on the restraint.
The front seat head restraints can also tilt forward and
rearward. The rear seat head restraints do not tilt.
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. This seat
can be converted to a storage area by lowering
page 2-64.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press a button to turn on the desired feature. A light on
that button will display to show which feature is on.
Rear Seats
There are three temperature settings for each feature.
A column of three lights next to the buttons will
display which setting the feature is in: high, medium
or low. Three lights indicate the highest setting,
two lights for medium and one light for the lowest
setting.
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have heated rear seats.
To operate the rear heated seats, the ignition must
be on.
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at
the highest setting. Each time you press the button,
the feature will go down one temperature setting.
The buttons are located
on the rear doors.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the display lights turn off.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the
heated seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to
turn on the heated seat and seatback.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Safety Belts
Your vehicle may be equipped with four-way lumbar
support, without the massage feature, for the outboard
rear seat positions.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
The rear lumbar support
controls are located on the
rear doors in front of the
heated seat buttons.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be, if you
are buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
To turn on the lumbar support feature, press the front of
the control to increase support or rearward to decrease
support. The lumbar control can also be moved up
and down to adjust the location of the support.
The ignition does not need to be on for the power
lumbar feature to work.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many
of them, people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.
That is why safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a
good driver does not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and
you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones,
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash,
your body would move too far forward, which
would increase the chance of head and neck
injury. Also, the belt would apply too much
force to the ribs, which are not as strong as
shoulder bones. You could also severely
injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash,
you would not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position
(if equipped), which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt
on page 1-29 for more information.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in
the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the
belt across you more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way. When the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up so that it is
stored on the safety belt stitching, near the guide loop.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten
the lap belt on smaller occupants.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has shoulder belt height adjusters for
the driver and right front passenger position.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are
met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Incorrect positioning of the shoulder belt
can reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt.
To move it down, press
the release button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can move
the height adjuster up
just by pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest. These
parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
top of the seatback.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the
lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
Be sure that the latch plate clicks when inserted
into the buckle.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,
try using the rear safety belt comfort guide.
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest
on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries
in a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States
and in every Canadian province says children up to
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can
strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
In addition, young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone; they need to use a child restraint.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate
infant restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides
restraint with the
seating surface
against the back
of the infant.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
injuries. Young children should always be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
A forward-facing
child seat (B) provides
restraint for the
child’s body with
the harness.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Because there are
different systems, it is important to refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint.
Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
{CAUTION:
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made for use with
the LATCH system.
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure
a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint
in a rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing
a child restraint with a top tether, you must also
use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to
properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint
must never be installed using only the top tether
and anchor.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Some child restraints that have top tethers are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to
be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child
restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the cover to
access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable headrest or
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the headrest or head
restraint.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor cover to
expose the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the tether
over the headrest or
head restraint.
in between the headrest
or head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-40.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41
for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
on this, including important safety information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-41 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
for additional information.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
{CAUTION:
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger
and the passenger seated directly behind the
right front passenger.
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps reduce
your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts
help keep you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and roof-rail
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe crashes where something hits the
side of your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant
and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on
or near any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle
by routing the rope or tie down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the path of
an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the right
front passenger’s seat. The passenger seat position
sensor and passenger safety belt buckle switch provide
information that is used to determine if the airbags should
deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
In addition, your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle also has a dual-depth passenger airbag that
adjusts the restraint according to crash severity, seat
location, and safety belt status using electronic frontal
sensor(s) and other special sensors which enable the
sensing system to monitor the position of the front
passenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates to a
reduced depth when the passenger seat is in a forward
position. For more rearward front seating positions,
the passenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth
(a full deployment), based on safety belt status and the
crash severity measured early in the event. (Always wear
your safety belt, even with frontal airbags.)
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags.
Your vehicle may have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted
side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side
of the vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags
will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly
the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate?
on page 1-59 for more information.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot get out of
the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail
airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some
time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag
module may be hot for several minutes. For location of
the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
on page 1-60.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using
the controls for those features.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead
console when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s
airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat
and safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine
if the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag if
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbags are off.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check
with your dealer/retailer.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off. See
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime
the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could
be because that person is not sitting properly in the
seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag,
depending upon the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag(s) off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-55 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment other than any that GM has approved for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle and
the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned
off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-55 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt
system parts. If you see anything that might keep a
safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The master key can be used for the driver’s door,
ignition, and glove box.
The valet key can only be used for the driver’s door and
ignition.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
functions, including lock, unlock, remote trunk
release, vehicle locator/panic alarm and remote
vehicle start, if your vehicle has this feature, will
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away.
If your vehicle has the remote vehicle start feature, you
will be able start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
However, the range may be less while the vehicle
is running and you may need to be closer to your
vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
/(Remote Vehicle Start): Your vehicle may
be started from outside the vehicle using the RKE
for additional information.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q(Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the parking lamps may flash once to indicate locking has
occurred, or the horn may chirp when the lock button is
pressed again within five seconds from the previous
press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-86 for additional information. If the vehicle has
the content theft-deterrent system, pressing the lock
button may also arm it. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-19.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
this button to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps
will flash and the horn will sound three times. Press and
hold this button for more than two seconds to activate the
panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn
will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will turn
off when the ignition is moved to ON/RUN or the alarm
button is pressed again. The ignition must be in LOCK/
OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again within
five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the
parking lamps can be programmed to come on for a set
amount of time when the vehicle is unlocked using the
page 3-86. Pressing the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter may disarm the content theft-deterrent
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. Remember to bring any
additional transmitters so they can also be re-coded
to match the new transmitter. Once your dealer/retailer
has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter
will not unlock your vehicle. The vehicle can have
a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it.
See RELEARN REMOTE KEY under DIC
V(Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold this
button for about one second to release the trunk lid.
The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to operate.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE transmitter
should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the
normal range in any location. If you have to get close
to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is
probably time to change the battery.
The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message
in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the RKE transmitter
battery is low. See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE
page 3-73 for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into the notch,
located above the metal base, and separate the
bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metal
object to do this.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with
the positive side of the battery facing up.
Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together tightly so moisture does not get in.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
additional information.
Remote Vehicle Start
The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to start the
engine from outside of the vehicle. It also starts up the
vehicle’s automatic climate control system. When the
remote start system is active, the climate control system
will heat and cool the inside of the vehicle according to
the previous settings of the system before turning the
vehicle off. The rear window defogger will be turned on by
the climate control system when it is cold outside. If the
vehicle has heated seats, they will also turn on when it is
for additional information. Cooled seats are not activated
during a remote start. Normal operation of the climate
control system will return after the key is turned to
page 3-40.
/(Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then
immediately press and hold the transmitter’s remote
start button until the turn signal lights flash or if the
vehicle’s lights are not visible, press and hold the
remote start button for at least four seconds. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remote start
button again after the vehicle has started will turn off
the ignition.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
Your RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation. However,
the range may be less while the vehicle is running.
As a result, you may need to be closer to your vehicle
to turn it off than you were to turn it on.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is
an emission control system malfunction.
To manually shut off a remote start:
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if
the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure
is too low.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may
be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running
that may be extended 10 more minutes. If you press and
release the transmitter lock button and then press and
hold the remote start button on the RKE transmitter again
before the first 10 minutes of engine running time has
expired, 10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote start
buttons are pressed again after five minutes of the engine
run time, 10 minutes are added and you now have
15 minutes of engine running. The added ten minutes
are considered a second remote vehicle start.
information when using remote start in a closed garage.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature. See your
dealer/retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer’s
remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle.
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time
extension have been used, the vehicle must be started
with the ignition key before you can use the remote
start feature again.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,
you must unlock the doors with the key or remote
keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.
Door Locks
From the outside, use either the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
{CAUTION:
From the inside, use the power door lock switches or
manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs are located
at the top of the door panel near the window.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly
and lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the knob.
Central Door Unlocking System
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking mode. When
unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the other
doors at the same time by turning the key clockwise
in the door lock cylinder twice.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
K(Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q(Lock): Press to lock the doors.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has security locks that prevent passengers
from opening the rear doors from the inside.
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The doors
will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move
the shift lever into PARK (P).
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors to
access them.
To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle will have
one of the following:
If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not
in PARK (P), have the person use the manual lock knob
or power door lock switch. When the door is closed
again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual
lock knob or power door lock switch to lock the door.
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on,
the door locks can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
These prompts allow the driver to choose various lock
and unlock settings. For programming information,
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Turn the knob to the vertical position to engage
the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
Trunk
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
{CAUTION:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch,
or by lifting the rear door manual lock knob.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk
lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Turn the knob to the horizontal position to
disengage the lock.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Lockout Protection
If the key is in the ignition and the power door lock
switch is used to lock the doors, all doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock. It is always
recommended that you remove the ignition key
when locking your vehicle.
The lockout protection feature can be overridden by
holding the power door lock switch for three seconds or
longer.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
G(Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunk
release button is located to the left of the steering wheel
next to the instrument panel brightness control. Press the
button to open the trunk. To use this feature, your vehicle
must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet
lockout switch must be off.
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter to open
the trunk. To disable this feature, see Valet Lockout
If the vehicle has lost power, the trunk can be accessed
using the Rear Seat Pass-Through. See Rear Seat
Pass-Through below.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk near the latch. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull
the release handle to open the trunk from the inside.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Pass-Through
Your vehicle has a small door in the rear seat.
This door allows you to access the trunk from
inside the vehicle.
The rear seat armrest must be down for the
pass-through door to open. To release the pass-through
door, move the release up with your fingers. To close the
door, raise it and push it until it latches.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
switches are located on
the driver’s door armrest.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.
The front power window switch operates with two
positions for both up and down movement and the rear
power window switch operates with one position for up
and two positions for down movement. Press the switch
to the first position to lower the window to the desired
level. Pull the switch up to raise the window. Your vehicle
has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that allows you to
use the power windows once the ignition has been turned
off. For more information, see Retained Accessory Power
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
Express-Down Window
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
This feature is on all windows. Press the switch to the
second position and release the switch to activate the
express-down feature. To stop the window as it is
lowering, press down or pull up briefly on the switch
again.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on the front windows. Pull the switch
up to the second position and release the switch
to activate the express-up feature. To stop the window
as it is raising, pull up or press down briefly on the
switch again.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
Programming the Power Windows
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause
the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to
normal operation once the obstruction or condition is
removed.
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, you will need
to replace or recharge your vehicle’s battery.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout button
is located on the driver’s door armrest near the window
switches.
{CAUTION:
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows still can
be raised or lowered using the driver’s window switches
when the lockout feature is active.
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
Sun Visors
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved to
the side while the auxiliary sunshade remains to block
the glare from the front. The visors also have side-to-side
slide capability.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to view the mirror.
The light will come on when the cover is opened.
It will go out when you close the cover. If your vehicle
has the adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up
or down to brighten or dim the light.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Power Sunshade
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
If your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helps to
reduce the amount of heat and light entering the
rear window.
The switch is located on
the overhead console.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf.
It only works while the ignition is on or while the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
To raise the power sunshade, press and release the
switch. To close the power sunshade, press and release
the switch again.
9(Off): Press this side of the button to turn the
lockout feature off. When the lockout feature is off,
you can open the trunk using either the keyless entry
transmitter or the trunk release button located near
the headlamp switch on the instrument panel.
Never store objects on the rear shelf because they may
get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about in
your vehicle.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— (On): Press this side of the button to turn the lockout
feature on. When the lockout feature is turned on,
the trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless entry
transmitter or the trunk release button located near
the headlamp switch on the instrument panel.
To arm the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch with
the door open or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The security light should come on
and stay on.
If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable the
Universal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.
3. Close all the doors. The security light should go off
within approximately 30 seconds.
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to
secure your vehicle.
If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or a RKE
transmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps will
flash for about 30 seconds.
information.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock
the doors with a key or use the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use a power door lock with
the door open or the RKE transmitter.
Content Theft-Deterrent
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident:
• Lock the vehicle with the door key or the manual
door lock after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the RKE
transmitter system. Pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter disables the theft-deterrent system.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the
alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.
If the ignition is off and any door is open, the security
light will flash, reminding you to arm the system.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm
by using the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
system, or by starting the car with a valid key.
Changes or modifications made to this system by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use the theft system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Testing the Alarm
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock or the
RKE system and close the door. Wait 30 seconds
until the security lamp goes off.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the hazard lights will flash.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s
door with your key, using the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter or by starting the car with a valid key.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
page 5-97. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service
the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key
is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
nine additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
If the engine does not start and the security light
comes on when trying to start the vehicle, there
may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key:
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn
it to the ON/RUN position within five seconds of
removing the original key.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting
to brake or slow the vehicle.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
the trailer towing capabilities of your
vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which the
ignition key can be inserted or removed. This position
locks the ignition and transmission and steering column.
It is a theft-deterrent feature.
Ignition Positions
With the ignition key in the
ignition, the key can be
turned to four different
positions:
If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to
left and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none
of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio
and windshield wipers operate while the engine is off.
To use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.
C (ON/RUN): This position is where the key returns
to after the vehicle is started. This position displays
some of the warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER DOOR OPEN
when the driver’s door is opened if the ignition is in
LOCK/OFF, ACC/ACCESSORY and the key is in the
for more information.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power to these accessories will work up to 10 minutes
or until the driver’s door is opened. For an additional
10 minutes of power, close all the doors and turn the key
to ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the key
in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime will sound,
when you open the driver’s door. Always remember to
remove your key from the ignition and take it with you.
This will lock your ignition and transmission. Also, always
remember to lock the doors.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for
an extended period of time.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:
• Audio System
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Power Windows
• Sunroof
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm
up and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each
try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side
of the engine, behind the transmission dipstick/fluid
fill location and next to the engine.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you
contact your dealer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give
you the best advice for that particular area.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
The automatic transmission may have a shift lever
located either on the steering column or on the console
between the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-31. If you are pulling a trailer,
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start the
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK
(P) while the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever. Push
the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever into another
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear
and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
{CAUTION:
Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the transmission. Have your
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D) can be used for towing. You may want to
shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the
vehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed more than
DRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You might choose
THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly,
winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there is
less shifting between gears and when going down
a steep hill.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Performance Shifting
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You can
use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed
as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
If your vehicle has this feature, it can detect a change
in driving patterns. If you make an aggressive driving
maneuver, the vehicle’s transmission automatically
shifts to the lowest possible gear to maximize vehicle
performance. The vehicle will automatically return to
normal operation when you return to normal driving
patterns.
Notice: Do not shift into SECOND (2) unless you
are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you
can damage your engine and/or transmission.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h). The brake light will come on
and stay on until the parking brake is released.
for more information.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
near the driver’s door.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal down with your left foot. When you lift your
left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the
released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
on the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-30 for more information.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
{CAUTION:
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-27.
Console Shift Lever
If your vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever,
use this procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P):
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle
and then to the left.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-30 for more information.
Steering Column Shift Lever
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
If your vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P):
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-31.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and
your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Console Shift
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If your console shift cannot be moved out of PARK (P)
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
more information.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P)
3. Let up on the shift lever and make sure the shift
lever is pushed all the way into PARK (P).
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.
4. Then, move the shift into the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
The shift lock is always functional except in the case of a
an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
Column Shift
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
If your park lock cable cannot be moved out of PARK (P)
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-23 for more information.
3. Shift out of the PARK (P) position to the
NEUTRAL (N) position.
4. Move the vehicle to a safe location.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake after you move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer,
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Operation
Mirrors
AUTO 3: Press and hold the “auto highbeam” button
for approximately three seconds to turn the compass
on or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Intellibeam™, OnStar®, and
Compass
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with OnStar® and a compass display. For more
information on Intellibeam™, see “Intellibeam Intelligent
High-Beam Headlamp Control System” under Exterior
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show the
correct direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a
similar magnetic item.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the “auto highbeam”
button for approximately nine seconds until a C is
shown in the compass display.
Automatic Dimming
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic dimming
rearview mirror. The automatic dimming feature is
activated whenever the vehicle is turned on and dims
only during nighttime driving.
The mirror can then be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if the vehicle is driven outside zone
eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust the compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted to account for zone changes, the
compass could give false readings.
To adjust for zone changes, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the “auto highbeam” button
approximately six seconds until a zone number
appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the “auto highbeam” button quickly until
you reach the correct zone number. Stop pressing
the button and the mirror will return to normal
operation. If C appears in the compass window,
the compass needs calibration. See “Compass
Calibration” listed previously.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Operation
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Compass Calibration
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass display. The mirror also contains
If after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (for example, N for North), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic
item. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display
in the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
Mirror Operation
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button
until a C is shown in the compass display.
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active.
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. Stop pressing
the button and the mirror will return to normal
operation. If C appears in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration. See Compass
Calibration listed previously.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Operation
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
Compass Calibration
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass display.
See “Compass Calibration” under Automatic Dimming
page 2-38 for more information.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on, the
compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven.
Compass Variance
See “Compass Variance” under Automatic Dimming
page 2-38 for more information.
Mirror Operation
O (On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active.
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has manual fold mirrors, the mirrors can be
manually folded inward to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror
toward the vehicle. To return the mirror to its original
position, push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors
to their original unfolded position before driving.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Your vehicle’s mirror
controls are located on
the driver’s door armrest.
If your vehicle has the power foldaway mirrors feature,
do the following:
• Press (C) to unfold the mirrors.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then
press the arrows located on the four-way control
pad to adjust the mirror.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
Park Tilt Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the
following occurs:
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it will
also be capable of performing the park tilt mirror feature.
This feature will allow the driver’s and passenger’s
side mirror to tilt to a factory programmed position when
the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This feature may be
useful in allowing you to view the curb when you
are parallel parking.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
either a five-second delay has occurred, or the ignition
is turned to LOCK/OFF, the driver’s and passenger’s
side mirror will return to its original position.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them three times using the mirror controls. This will reset
them to their normal position.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s side
mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature is controlled by the on and off settings
on the automatic dimming rearview mirror.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Convex Mirror
Outside Heated Mirrors
When the rear window defogger is turned on, it also
warms both outside rearview mirrors to help clear them
of fog or ice. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
information.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver’s
seat. This mirror does not have a dimming feature.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
{CAUTION:
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA)
The Ultrasonic Front and Rear Park
Assist (UFRPA) system does not replace
driver vision. It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA) system, it helps you park easier and
helps you avoid colliding with objects such as parked
vehicles. It operates at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
It can determine how close objects are to the front
bumper, up to 4 feet (1.2 m) in front of your vehicle and
the rear bumper, up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle.
The distance sensors are located on the front and rear
bumper.
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care before moving
forward and while backing; vehicle damage,
injury, or death could occur. Even with UFRPA,
always check in front of your vehicle before
moving forward and behind your vehicle
before backing up. While moving forward and
backing, be sure to look for objects and check
your vehicle’s mirrors.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the System Works
UFRPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved out of PARK (P). The system does not work at a
forward or reverse speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk level.
Objects must also be within 4 feet (1.2 m) in front of your
vehicle and 8 feet (2.5 m) from your rear bumper. This
distance may be less during warmer or humid weather.
When backing, if objects are detected at the same time
near both the front and rear bumpers, both color-coded
light displays will notify you of objects close to each
bumper. If there are objects detected near both bumpers,
the beeps will only be sounded to notify that objects are
close to the rear bumper. However, if while you are
backing and an object comes within 1 ft (0.3 m) of the
front bumper, and at the same time there is another
object further than 1 ft (0.3 m) from the rear bumper,
then the beeps will only be sounded to notify you of
the closer object that is near the front bumper.
Front Parking Assist
Display
Rear Parking Assist
Display
The front display is located on top of the instrument
panel to the right of the driver. The front display will have
either three or six lights to provide distance and system
information. With Adaptive Cruise control (ACC), it will
have three lights along with the ACC lights. Without ACC,
it will have six lights. High-toned beeps from the front
speakers are for objects detected near the front bumper.
The system can be disabled using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under DIC Operation
The rear display is located near the rear window
and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder.
The rear display uses three color-coded lights to provide
distance and system information. Low-toned beeps
from the rear speakers are for the rear bumper.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Moving Forward
Backing
When the vehicle is started, the front display will briefly
illuminate to let you know the system is working.
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever
is moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will
then briefly illuminate to let you know the system
is working.
The following describes what will occur with the front
display as you get closer to a object detected in the front
of your vehicle:
The following describes what will occur with the rear
display as you get closer to an object detected in
the rear of your vehicle:
Description
English
Metric
amber/amber lights
4 ft
1.2 m
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and beep for
three seconds
English
8 ft
40 in
23 in
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
ACC — one amber light
four amber lights
ACC — two amber lights
40 in
23 in
1.0 m
0.6 m
four amber/ two red lights
ACC — two amber
lights/one red light
1 ft
0.3 m
four amber/ two red lights
and beep for
three seconds
The system can be disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under
information.
1 ft
0.3 m
ACC — two amber
lights/one red light and
beep for three seconds
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
Side Blind Zone Alert
Your vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system. Read this entire section before using the system.
• The driver disables the system.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So be
sure to keep your vehicle’s front and rear bumpers
free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning
page 5-90.
{CAUTION:
The Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) system
does not detect vehicles outside the side blind
zones, which may be rapidly approaching.
SBZA is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. SBZA is only a lane
change aid. If you do not use proper care
before changing lanes, vehicle damage, injury,
or death could occur. Even with SBZA, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your turn signal before
changing lanes.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of your trunk during your
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the
rear display. Once the attached object is removed,
UFRPA will return to normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to your vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
The SBZA system is an aid that may help you
avoid lane change crashes with vehicles in your
side blind spots (zones). When the system detects
a vehicle in the side blind zone, amber SBZA
displays will light up in your side mirrors.
If the system is still disabled after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This indicates that it may be unsafe for you to change
lanes. Before making a lane change, always check the
SBZA display, check the outside and rearview mirrors,
look over your shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and
start the turn signal.
SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately
one lane over from both sides of the vehicle,
11 ft. or 3.5 m. This zone starts at each side mirror
and goes back approximately 16 ft. (5.0 m). The height
of the zone is approximately between 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
and 6 ft. (2.0 m) off the ground.
The SBZA detection zones do not change if your
vehicle is towing a trailer. So be extra careful when
changing lanes while towing a trailer.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the System Works
When the System Does Not Seem
To Work Properly
If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system
is on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system
needs service. Take your vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
SBZA displays may occasionally light up due to guard
rails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects.
This is normal system operation, your vehicle does
not need service.
Left Side Mirror
Display
Right Side Mirror
Display
SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners of
the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions,
still displays the CLEAN SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM message after cleaning the bumper, see
your dealer/retailer.
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays
will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. When you are driving forward, the left or
right side mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is
detected in that blind zone. If you activate a turn signal
and a vehicle has been detected on the same side, the
SBZA display will flash to give you extra warning not to
change lanes.
The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attached
to your vehicle, or a bicycle or object is extending out
to either side of the vehicle.
SBZA displays do not come on while your vehicle is
approaching or passing other vehicles.
When SBZA is disabled without the driver turning it off
and the driver attempts to turn SBZA back on using the
DIC, the SIDE ALERT ON option will not be selectable if
the necessary conditions for normal system operation are
not met.
SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-68 for more information. If the SBZA
is disabled by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays
will not light up.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SBZA Error Messages
Lane Departure Warning
The following messages may appear in the DIC:
Your vehicle may have a Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system. Read this entire section before using the system.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF: This
message indicates that the driver has turned the
system off.
{CAUTION:
CLEAN SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: This
message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled
because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may be blocked
by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even heavy rainstorms.
This message may also activate during heavy rain or
due to road spray. Your vehicle does not need service.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
does not steer the vehicle and is only an aid to
help you stay in your driving lane. The LDW
system may not:
• Provide you with enough time to avoid a
lane change collision.
• Be loud enough for you to hear the
warning beeps.
• Work properly under bad weather
conditions or if the windshield is not
kept clean.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If this
message appears, both SBZA displays will remain on
indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.
If these displays remain on after continued driving,
the system needs service. Take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
• Detect lane markings and will not detect
road edges.
• Warn you that your vehicle is crossing a
lane marking if the system does not detect
the lane marking.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the System Works
CAUTION: (Continued)
LDW uses a camera located between the inside rearview
mirror and the windshield to detect the lane markings.
LDW will indicate the system is working
whenever it detects either the left or right lane
marking. So if you depart on the side of the
lane that LDW is not detecting, LDW will not
warn you.
@ (Lane Departure Warning): To turn LDW on and off,
press the LDW control, located by the exterior
headlamp control. An indicator on the control will light to
indicate that LDW is on.
When the vehicle is
If you do not carefully maintain your vehicle
position within the lane, vehicle damage, injury,
or death could occur. Even with LDW, always
keep your attention on the road and maintain
proper vehicle position within the lane. Always
keep the windshield clean and do not use LDW
in bad weather conditions.
started, the LDW symbol,
located in the instrument
panel cluster, will
briefly come on to indicate
that the light is operational.
When you cross a detected lane marking, the LDW
symbol will flash and you will hear three beeps.
LDW will not warn you if your turn signal is on or if you
make a sharp maneuver. Before making a lane change,
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder
for vehicles and hazards, and start your turn signal before
changing lanes.
LDW only operates at speeds of 35 mph (56 km) or
greater. If LDW is turned on when traveling at these
speeds, the LDW symbol will appear green if the system
detects a left or right lane marking. This symbol will
change to amber and flash and three beeps will sound
if you cross a detected lane marking without using your
turn signal.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LDW symbol does not appear, LDW is not
currently operating and will not warn you.
LDW Error Message
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM: This
message may appear in the DIC to indicate that LDW is
not working properly. If this message remains on after
continued driving, the system needs service. Take your
vehicle to your dealer/retailer. See DIC Warnings and
If you would like to change the volume of the warning
chime, see Chime Volume under DIC Vehicle
When the System Does Not Seem
To Work Properly
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE:
This message may appear in the DIC if LDW
does not activate due to a temporary condition.
more information.
The LDW symbol will not appear when the system is
having difficulty seeing the lines on the road or if the view
of the camera on the windshield is blocked with mud, dirt,
snow, ice, or slush, if the windshield is damaged, or when
weather limits visibility, such as while driving in fog, rain,
or snow conditions. This is normal operation, your vehicle
does not need service. For cleaning instructions,
LDW warnings may occasionally occur due to tar
marks, shadows, cracks in the road, or other road
imperfections. This is normal system operation, your
vehicle does not need service.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.
A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions & Connections Plan. For more information,
press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available until
you register with OnStar.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also be linked
to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide
in the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar advisor by
pressing the OnStar button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Virtual Advisor
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free
Calling that uses your minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. By
pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice
commands, you can browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information
(Only available in the continental U.S.).
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless you are in a place where the
wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
more information.
Location information about your vehicle is only available if
the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press, Emergency
button press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys.
The vehicle information usually includes your GPS
location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the accident that your vehicle
has been involved in (e.g. the direction from which your
vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor feature
of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends
OnStar your GPS location so that we can provide you
with location-based services.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming.
You only need the original remote control transmitter for
Fixed Code programming. It is also recommended that
upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the
programmed buttons should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons” later in this section.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
To program up to three devices:
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or security
device you are programming.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above the
selected button, should slowly blink. You may
need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as
an additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what you used for the garage door opener.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this button.
After you press this button, you will have 30 seconds
to complete the following steps.
If these instructions do not work, you probably
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are
Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat
the procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see a
row of dip switches similar to the graphic above,
you have a Fixed Code garage door opener.
If you do not see a row of dip switches, return to
the previous section for Programming Universal
Home Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be used
when programming the Universal Home Remote. If
the total number of switches on the motor head and
hand held transmitter are different, or if the dip switch
settings are different, use the dip switch settings on
the motor head unit to program your Universal Home
Remote. The motor head dip switch settings can also
be used when you do not have the original hand held
transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled as
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes you
enter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.
Be sure to enter the switch settings that you wrote
down in Step 2, in order from left to right, into
the Universal Home Remote, when completing
Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating
the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use
to control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the
button from five to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when you
sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what you used for
the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock and
unlock.
Cupholder(s)
There are cupholders located in the full floor console, or
in the front of the center seat console. Cupholders are
also located in the rear armrest. To access the full floor
console cupholder slide the cover back. To access the
center seat console cupholder, fold open the front of the
console.
Coinholder(s)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a coinholder.
If your vehicle has a full floor console it has two storage
areas. To access the upper tray storage, lift the left
lever located in the front of the armrest lid. To access
the lower storage area, lift the right lever. If your vehicle
has a center seat console it will have two storage areas.
To access the upper storage area, press the button
located on the front of the armrest and lift the armrest lid.
To access the lower storage area, pull the strap located
behind the cup holder.
Front Storage Area
Your vehicle has a removable front storage bin. To open,
push down then release to reveal the front bin and
accessory outlet. To remove, push up and forward to
loosen, then pull the bin out. If your vehicle has a center
flex storage unit, pull the handle rearward to open the
front bin and accessory power outlet. To remove, pull
the bin out.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the floor mat, pull up on the rear of the mat
to disconnect it from the locator hooks.
Center Flex Storage Unit
Your vehicle may have a center flex storage unit that
includes a front center seat with a lap belt and an
underseat storage compartment. The center seatback
can also be used as a fold down armrest. Cupholders
are also located at the front edge of the storage unit and
can be accessed by folding the compartment forward.
To reinstall the floor mat, line up the openings in the
floor mat over the locator hooks and push it down
into place.
Rear Seat Armrest
When not being used, the center seat lap belt can
be stored in the underseat storage compartment.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat center
console and armrest. To open the console, push
the button and lift the lid. Inside the console are
two cupholders that can be pulled out when in use.
Floor Mats
The floor mat is designed to remain in position under
your feet and out of reach of the accelerator pedal.
The driver side floor mat is held in place by two locator
hooks.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. The net
is not for heavier loads. Store them as far forward
as you can.
Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Open: The express open feature will operate
from the closed or partially open position. To express
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s side
switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a
desired position other than to the express-open position,
press the switch again, in either direction, to stop the
movement. If the sunshade is in the closed position, it
will open with the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.
The switches that operate
the sunroof are located on
the overhead console.
Vent Open: From the closed position, press and hold
the passenger’s side switch forward to vent the sunroof.
The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the
full vent position. The sunshade must be opened
manually.
Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the driver’s
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be
closed manually.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be turned
to ON/RUN or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must
page 2-24.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons.
on page 3-30.
Q. Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped).
R. Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control.
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel (If Equipped).
G. Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist and
Adaptive Cruise Control Display (If Equipped).
on page 3-19.
U. Traction Control System Button (Console-Shift
Vehicles). See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-5.
on page 2-27.
Valet Lockout Switch. See Valet Lockout Switch
on page 2-18.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police
and others that you have a problem. The front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
towards the center of
the instrument panel.
A tilt wheel lets you adjust the steering wheel before
you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to the
highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that lets you tilt the steering wheel is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel
to a comfortable position
and release the lever
to lock the wheel in place.
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals do not work.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition switch.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button for this
feature is located on
the steering wheel.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power tilt
and telescope wheel
control is located on
the outboard side of
the steering column.
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel on
or off. A light on the button will display while the feature
is turned on.
The steering wheel will take about three minutes to
start heating.
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control
up and the steering wheel tilts up. Push the control down
and the steering wheel goes down.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control
rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear
of the vehicle. To set the memory position, see DIC
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
The lever returns automatically when the turn is
complete. If you momentarily press and release the
lever, the turn signal will flash 3 times.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster and in the
outside rearview mirror will
flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. The lever returns when it is
released.
• 23Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will sound
and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
TURN SIGNAL ON after driving about a mile to remind
you to turn it off. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-73.
on page 3-13.
page 3-13.
page 3-15.
on page 3-15.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned out signal
bulb. Other drivers will not see the turn signal.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs
if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Push forward to change the headlamps from low
beam to high. Pull the lever back and then release
it to change from high beam to low.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides
an audible and visual alert if you approach a vehicle too
quickly that is directly ahead. FCA also provides a
visual alert with no audible alert if you are following
another vehicle much too closely. The FCA alert symbol
is located on top of the instrument panel to the right
of the driver. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control
radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path,
within a distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
The FCA control is located
on the steering wheel.
{CAUTION:
To enable or disable FCA, press the Adaptive Cruise
page 3-19.
FCA is only a warning system and does not
apply the brakes. When you are approaching a
vehicle or object too rapidly or when you are
following a vehicle too closely that is ahead of
you, FCA may not provide you with enough
time to avoid a collision. FCA is not designed
to warn the driver of pedestrians or animals.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to
take action and apply the brakes. For more
FCA is enabled when the green light on the button is lit.
FCA is disabled when the indicator light is amber.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alerting the Driver
{CAUTION:
The FCA alert symbol will
flash and a warning beep
will sound when driver
action may be required.
• On winding roads, FCA may not detect
a vehicle ahead. You could crash into a
vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA
on winding roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as in
fog, rain, or snow, FCA performance is
limited. There may not be enough warning
distance to the vehicle in front of you. Do
not rely on FCA in low visibility conditions.
The alert symbol will flash when:
• Your vehicle is approaching another vehicle
too quickly.
• Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead of
you much too closely.
{CAUTION:
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another
Adaptive Cruise Control button, you might
go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Be careful not to press adaptive cruise buttons
unless you want to use cruise control.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
The vehicle ahead symbol, located next to the FCA
symbol, will only appear when a vehicle ahead of you is
detected in your path. If this symbol does not appear,
or disappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles
you may see ahead. The symbol may disappear on
curves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when another
vehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCA system
will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in
your driving lane.
{CAUTION:
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. You could crash into an
object ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA when
approaching stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects.
Unnecessary Alerts
{CAUTION:
FCA may occasionally provide alerts that you consider
unnecessary. It could respond to a turning vehicle
ahead of you, guard rails, signs, and other stationary
objects. This is normal operation, your vehicle does
not need service.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. FCA may not help you avoid a
collision under these conditions. Do not use
FCA when the radar is blocked by snow, ice,
or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning
the System” under Adaptive Cruise Control
on page 3-19.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE
RADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-73.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
6 (Delay): Turn the band to choose the delay time
between wipe cycles. The wiper speed can be set for a
long or short delay between wipes. The closer the band
is set to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean
the lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to
the first solid band past the delay settings for steady
wiping at low speed.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
The flash-to-pass feature will only work with the
headlamps on. It does not work with Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If the blades become worn
or damaged, replace with new blades or blade inserts.
If the headlamps are on low beam, pulling the turn
signal towards you will flash the high beams.
Windshield Wipers
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
Your vehicle has wiper-activated headlamps. After the
windshield wipers have completed eight wipe cycles
within four minutes, the headlamps automatically
for more information.
8(Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let
go. The wipers stop after one wipe. For more wipe
cycles, hold the band longer on mist.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the system and frequency of wipes. The highest
sensitivity setting, level five is closest to low. A single
wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper stalk
to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that the
sensitivity level has been increased.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor is
mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate the
wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up
on the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear
the windshield depending on driving conditions and the
sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes
will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more
frequently. The Rainsense™ II wipers operate in a
delay mode as well as a continuous low or high speed
as needed. If the system is left on for long periods
of time, occasional wipes may occur without any
moisture on the windshield. This is normal and indicates
that the Rainsense™ II system is activated.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and
are not affected by the Rainsense™ II function. The
Rainsense™ II system can be overridden at any time
by manually turning the wiper band to low or high speed.
When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps will
turn on automatically. The headlamps will turn off again
once the wipers turn off if it is light enough outside.
If it is dark, they will remain on. See Wiper Activated
The Rainsense™ II system can be activated by turning
the wiper band to one of the five sensitivity levels
indicated on the wiper stalk. The position closest to off
is the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This allows
more rain or snow to collect on the windshield between
wipes. Turning the wiper band away from you to
higher sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity of
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on
the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
moisture sensor to malfunction.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from your windshield. Sliding the switch on the turn
signal/multifunction lever to this position and then
releasing it will activate the heated windshield washer
fluid system. This activation will initiate four heated
wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may
take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles.
The heated windshield washer fluid system may be
turned off at any time by sliding the switch on the turn
signal/multifunction lever to this position again.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,
steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short
period of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is
a normal condition.
J (Washer Fluid): Press and release this paddle,
located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever,
to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers
will clear the windshield and either stop or return to
your preset speed. For more washer cycles, press
and hold the paddle.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID will be displayed
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the
washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-73.
_ (Heated Washer Fluid): The heated windshield
washer fluid system, if your vehicle has this feature,
may be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, or bugs
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control automatically turns off. See Traction
conditions let you safely use it again, you can turn
the cruise control back on.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This is helpful
on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When cruise control
is on, you will see a cruise light on the instrument
panel cluster.
Setting Cruise Control
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip,
and you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control
buttons are located
on left side of the
steering wheel.
The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed.
1. Press the cruise control button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET– button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the
cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
I(On): This position turns on the system.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, you can press the +RES (resume/
accelerate) button to return to your desired preset speed.
The cruise light displays again.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
The vehicle returns to and stays at your preset speed.
If you press and hold the +RES button, the vehicle
speed increases until you release the button or apply
the brake. Do not hold in the +RES button, if you do
not want the vehicle speed to increase.
SET– (Set): Press this button to set the speed.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control.
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is
set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET– button, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
now cruises at the higher speed.
• Press the SET– button until you reach the lower
desired speed, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET– button briefly. Each time you do this, the
vehicle slows down approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until you get
up to the desired speed, and then release the
button. To increase your speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the +RES button and then
release it. Each time you do this, the vehicle
accelerates approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
slows down to your previous cruise control speed.
The accelerate feature only works after you have set
the cruise control speed by pressing the SET– button.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Adaptive Cruise Control
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Applying the brake or shifting into a lower gear
ends cruise control. If you need to apply the brake
or shift to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you might not want to attempt to use the
cruise control feature.
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brake
pedal, or press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Erasing Speed Memory
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to
traditional cruise control. It allows you to keep
cruise control engaged in moderate traffic conditions
without having to constantly reset your cruise control.
Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a
vehicle directly ahead in your path, within a distance
of 330 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver,
the system can apply limited braking or acceleration
of the vehicle automatically to maintain a selected
follow distance to the vehicle ahead. Braking is limited
to 0.25 g’s (2.45 m/sec2) of deceleration, which is
comparable to moderate application of the vehicle’s
brakes. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control, apply
the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, the vehicle
will react like traditional cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard
braking or bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians or animals. When you are
approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive
Cruise Control may not have time to slow
your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to
take action and apply the brakes. For more
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise
Control may not detect a vehicle ahead.
You could crash into a vehicle ahead
of you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
on winding roads.
CAUTION: (Continued)
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Adaptive Cruise
controls are located
on the steering wheel.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
crash when you are driving in conditions
where vehicles may suddenly slow or stop
ahead of you, enter your lane, or cross
your vehicle’s path. If you are driving in
these conditions, do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control. The warning beep and
alert symbol may indicate that you are
driving in conditions where Adaptive
Cruise Control should not be used.
See “Alerting the Driver” in this section.
• On slippery roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel
The cruise control buttons are located on outboard
side of the steering wheel.
] (On): This position turns on the system.
spinning, and you could lose control. Do
not use cruise control on slippery roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as
when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,
Adaptive Cruise Control performance
is limited. There may not be enough
distance to adapt to the changing traffic
conditions. Do not use cruise control
when visibility is low.
+ Res (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed or
to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise Control
is already active.
Set–: Press this button to set the speed or to decrease
the set speed when Adaptive Cruise Control is already
active.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel adaptive
cruise control.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+GAP (Increase Following Distance): Press this
button to increase the distance between your vehicle
and other vehicles.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
1. Press the ] (On) button.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press in the SET– button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
−GAP (Decrease Following Distance): Press this
button to decrease the distance between your vehicle
and other vehicles.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may immediately
apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead is too
close or moving slower than your vehicle.
Adaptive cruise control will not work if the master
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control
With the Set Button
The on symbol is located on the display at the top of
the instrument panel to the right of the driver. When
the on symbol is lit on the display, it indicates that
Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
{CAUTION:
A message on the DIC will also display when
Adaptive Cruise Control is set. See DIC Warnings
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control
switch on when you are not using cruise, you
might hit a button and go into cruise when you
do not want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch off until you want to use cruise control.
Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds,
and weather conditions when adjusting your set speed.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when
the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage.
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
Adaptive Cruise Control back on.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the speed
you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in your path.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the Adaptive Cruise Control is set at a desired
speed and then the brakes are applied. This will turn
off the Adaptive Cruise Control. But it does not need
to be reset.
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET– button and then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will now cruise at the higher speed.
• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until the desired
set speed is displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), then release the switch. To increase
your set speed in very small amounts, move the
switch briefly to +RES. Each time this is done, your
set speed increases by 1 mph (1 km/h).
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press the +RES button. Adaptive Cruise Control
will be engaged with the previously chosen set speed.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle,
it will adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the
follow distance (gap) you select.
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the system
determines there is not a vehicle in front of you. At that
point, your vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.
Use the plus and minus buttons on the steering wheel
to adjust the follow distance.
Press the plus button to increase the distance or the
minus button to decrease the distance. The first button
press shows the current follow distance setting on
the DIC. The current follow distance setting will
be maintained until you change it.
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
Press the SET– button until you reach the lower speed
desired, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
SET– button. Each time this is done, your set speed
decreases by 1 mph (1 km/h) slower.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are six follow distances to choose from.
The follow distance selection ranges from near to far
(one second to two seconds follow time). The distance
maintained for a selected follow distance will vary
based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed
the further back your vehicle will follow. Consider
traffic and weather conditions when selecting the
follow distance. The range of selectable distances
may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving
conditions. If you prefer to travel at a follow distance
farther than Adaptive Cruise Control allows, disengage
the system and drive manually.
The alert symbol will flash and a warning beep will sound
when driver action may be required. If Adaptive Cruise
Control is engaged, the alert symbol will flash when:
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a vehicle
too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
20 mph (32 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
information.
Alerting the Driver
The Adaptive Cruise
Control alert symbol
is located on the
display at the top of
the instrument panel
to the right of the driver.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited braking
ability to slow your vehicle. In some cases,
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Be ready to take action and apply the brakes
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
{CAUTION:
The Vehicle Ahead
symbol is located on the
top of the instrument panel
to the right of the driver.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may
not have time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when the radar is blocked by snow, ice,
or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning
the System” later in this section.
The Vehicle Ahead symbol only appears when a vehicle
is detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles
you may see ahead.
Adaptive Cruise Control automatically slows your
vehicle down when approaching a slower moving
vehicle. It then adjusts your vehicle speed to follow
the vehicle in front at the selected follow distance.
Your vehicle speed increases or decreases to follow
the vehicle in front of you, but will not exceed the
set speed. It may apply limited braking, if necessary.
When braking is active, your brake lights will come on.
Braking may feel or sound different than if you were
applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
Low-Speed Deactivation
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control
will begin to disengage. The Driver Alert symbol
will flash and the warning beep will sound. The driver
must take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will
not slow the vehicle to a stop.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. You could crash
into an object ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control when approaching
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects.
Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive Cruise
Control Override
If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle,
use the accelerator pedal. While you are doing this,
the system will not automatically apply the brakes.
A message will appear on the DIC. See DIC Warnings
your foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise
Control will return to normal operation and be able
to apply the brakes, if needed.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may
accelerate toward objects, such as a stopped
vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead
vehicle changes lanes. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you should
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in a
sharp curve. It may reduce your speed if the curve
is too sharp.
{CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,
the system will not automatically apply the
brakes. You could crash into a vehicle ahead
of you. Do not rest your foot on the accelerator
pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
Curves in the Road
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.
Give extra attention in curves and be ready
to use the brakes if necessary. Select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve,
Adaptive Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle
in your lane and accelerate your vehicle. When this
happens the Vehicle Ahead symbol will not appear.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Exit Ramps
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set
speed while entering or on highway exit ramps.
You could be startled by this acceleration and
even lose control of the vehicle. Disengage
Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a
highway exit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control while entering or on exit ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that is
not in your lane and apply the brakes.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally, provide a
driver alert and/or braking that you consider unnecessary.
It could respond to signs, guardrails, and other stationary
objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle
until it is completely in the lane. Be ready to take
action and apply the brakes yourself.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Adaptive Cruise Control on Hills
and When Towing a Trailer
Erasing Set Speed Memory
Press the Adaptive Cruise Control button or turn
the ignition off.
Other Messages
There are three additional messages that may appear
on the DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR.
These messages will appear to indicate a problem with
the Adaptive Cruise Control. See DIC Warnings and
How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills
and when towing a trailer depends on your vehicle’s
speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions and the steepness
of the hills. It may not detect a vehicle in your lane while
driving on hills. When going up steep hills, you may want
to use the accelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, especially when towing a
trailer, you may want to brake to keep your speed down.
Applying the brake disengages the system. You may
choose not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills,
especially when towing a trailer.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean the
lens. Remember, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
in icy conditions, or when visibility is low, such as in fog,
rain or snow.
The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a
soft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try to
engage the Adaptive Cruise Control. If you are
unable to do so, see your dealer/retailer.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
To turn off the system, apply the brake pedal,
press the cancel button, or press the Adaptive
Cruise Control button.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): This position automatically turns
on the headlamps at normal brightness, together
with the following:
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps
control is located on
the instrument panel
to the left of the
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• IntelliBeam™
steering wheel.
;(Parking Lamps): This position turns on the
parking lamps together with the following:
• Instrument Panel Lights
• License Plate Lamps
• Taillamps
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Taillamps
• Side Marker Lamps
• Parking Lamps
The parking brake indicator light comes on and stays on
while the parking lamps are on with the engine off
and the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Fog Lamps
2(Headlamps): This position turns on the headlamps
together with the previously listed lamps. A warning
chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while
the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
O(Off): This position turns off the exterior lamps
except for Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
-(Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps control to
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with IntelliBeam™
IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
IntelliBeam™ only activates the high-beams when
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the
automatic control of IntelliBeam™, until any of the
following situations occur:
IntelliBeam™ is an enhancement to the vehicle’s
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on the
rearview mirror, this system turns the vehicle’s high-beam
headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic
conditions.
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.
• The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
The IntelliBeam™ system turns the high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no other
traffic present, and the IntelliBeam system is enabled.
• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the
high-beam position or the flash-to-pass feature is
used. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™
Press and release the IntelliBeam™ button on the inside
rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam™ indicator on the mirror
turns on to indicate the system is on. Once the system
has been turned on, it remains on each time the vehicle
is started, but the IntelliBeam system must be enabled.
When either of these conditions occur, the
IntelliBeam™ feature is disabled and the
IntelliBeam™ light in the mirror turns off until the
high-beam stalk is returned to the neutral position.
To enable the IntelliBeam™ system, turn the exterior
lamp control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction
lever in its neutral position. The High-Beam On
Light appears on the instrument panel cluster when
the high-beams are on. See Highbeam On Light
on page 3-67.
• If IntelliBeam™ was using low-beams prior to this
action, the IntelliBeam™ feature is temporarily
disabled until the stalk is returned to the neutral
position.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You might need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam™ is disabled until the
control is turned back to the AUTO position.
• The IntelliBeam™ system is turned off at the inside
rearview mirror.
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™
at the Rearview Mirror
IntelliBeam™ can be disabled by using the controls
on the inside rearview mirror.
IntelliBeam™ might not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because of
any of the following:
AUTO 3(On/Off): Press this button on the inside
rearview mirror to disable the system. The IntelliBeam™
indicator turns off and does not come back on until
the IntelliBeam™ button is pressed again.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow, and/or road spray.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,
mist, or other airborne obstructions.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, or
obstructed by something that blocks the view of the
IntelliBeam™ light sensor.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,
haze, or other obstructions.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the
vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeam™
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps
and taillamps.
When IntelliBeam™ has turned on the high-beams,
pull or push the high-beam stalk. This will disable
IntelliBeam™. The IntelliBeam™ indicator on the mirror
turns off. To turn IntelliBeam™ back on, press the
IntelliBeam™ button on the mirror.
A different sensitivity setting is available for
dealer/retailer diagnostics. This is done by pushing and
holding this button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam™
indicator light flashes three times. If you accidentally
activate this, the vehicle’s setting automatically is reset
when the ignition is turned off and then on again.
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
The light sensor is
located on the inside of
the vehicle in front of
the inside rearview mirror.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using
glass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor
window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
surface of the sensor window.
The DRL system makes the turn signal lamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
• The exterior lamp control is in the off position.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P)
(United States only).
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers are turned on and
have completed eight wipe cycles within four minutes.
• The light sensor is covered or not detecting light.
See “Sensors” under Dual Climate Control System
on page 3-40.
When the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, the
wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off.
The wiper-activated headlamps also turn off if the
windshield wipers are turned off.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps such as
the parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the
DRL are being used. The instrument panel will not be
lit up either.
To drive the vehicle with the DRL off, turn off automatic
lighting and manually turn on the parking lamps or fog
lamps, if the vehicle has them.
As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enough
outside, the turn signal lamps turn off and normal
low-beam headlamp operation occurs.
Fog Lamps
When automatic lighting is on and it is bright enough
outside, the regular lamps go off, and the DRL takes over.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take approximately one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if there
is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness knob is in the full bright
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
-(Fog Lamps): The fog lamps button is located on
the exterior lamps control. The exterior lamps control
is located on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering column.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.
Press the exterior lamps button to turn the fog lamps
on or off. A light will come on in the instrument
panel cluster when the fog lamps are in use.
Turning on automatic lighting or the headlamps will
deactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps
were turned on instead, the DRL will still deactivate.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,
the fog lamps will turn off. The fog lamps come back on
again when the high-beam headlamps are turned off.
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn off
automatic lighting and shift the transmission into
PARK (P). Placing the vehicle in PARK (P) disables
the DRL. The DRL will stay off until the vehicle is shifted
out of PARK (P).
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cornering Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The cornering lamps come on when the headlamps
or parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with
the multifunction lever. They provide more light
for cornering.
D(Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel and
footwell lights, if equipped.
The button for this control is located below the exterior
lamps control.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Push the button in and release to extend the button.
Turn the button clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lights.
If the exterior lamp button has been left on, the
exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF and a door has
been opened. This protects against draining the
battery if the headlamps or parking lamps are
accidentally left on. If you need to leave the lamps
on for more than 10 minutes, use the exterior lamp
control to turn the lamps back on after the ignition
is turned to LOCK/OFF and any door is opened.
Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner
above the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning
the instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise
or when any door is opened and it is dark outside.
Puddle lamps are located on the bottom of the front
and rear door trim.
Professional vehicles have an additional dome lamp
and also opera lamps.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entry Lighting
Reading Lamps
This feature turns on the courtesy lamps and the
backlighting for the door switches and the exterior
lamp control when a door is opened or if the remote
keyless entry transmitter unlock button is pressed.
If activated due to the transmitter, the lighting remains
active for about 40 seconds. Since the entry lighting
system uses the light sensor, it must be dark outside in
order for the courtesy lamps to turn on. The courtesy
lamps turn off approximately 25 seconds after the
last door is closed. They will dim to off if the ignition
key is turned to ON/RUN, or immediately deactivate
if the power locks are activated.
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console
on the headliner and in the rear door opening. These
lamps come on automatically when any door is opened
and it is dark outside.
For manual operation, press the button to turn them on.
Press it again to turn them off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Footwell Lamps
If your vehicle has footwell lamps, they are located
under the instrument panel and at the rear of the
front seats. These lamps provide soft light to the front
and rear floor areas. They dim with the instrument
panel cluster lights, before going out completely.
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays
and backlighting during daylight hours when the key is
in the ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature
is fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness
outside and the parking lamps are active, the digital
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel
brightness knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwise
to brighten lighting.
Footwell lighting brightness can be adjusted with the
instrument panel brightness control located below
the exterior lamps control. See Instrument Panel
off before the instrument panel lights are at their
lowest level of brightness.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Load Management
Electric Power Management
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine
when the battery is in a heavy discharge condition.
During times of high electrical loading, the engine
may idle at a higher revolutions per minute (rpm)
setting than normal to make sure the battery charges.
High electrical loads may occur when several of
the following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,
rear window defogger, the climate control fan at high
speeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer
to clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as
warm as they usually do and the climate control fan
may cut back to a lower speed. For more battery saving
information, see “Battery Saver Active Message”
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps,
reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp
are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are
left on, they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes,
if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come back
on again until one of the following occurs:
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable
to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the
driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
• The ignition is turned on.
• The exterior lamps control is turned off,
then on again.
The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they
are manually turned on before the ignition is off.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone,
CB radio, etc.
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When
the ignition is turned off, the power to these features
will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. Power will
be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door
or trunk is opened, or the courtesy lamp switch is
turned on.
If your vehicle has a center console, the power outlet is
located inside the lower storage area. There are outlets
also on the right front lower part of the driver’s seat
and under the climate control system next to the ashtray.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear
seat area located on the door armrests next to the
ashtrays.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
the plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
There may be a small cap that must be removed to
access the accessory power outlet. When not using
the outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet can be used at any time.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in
for an extended period of time while the vehicle is
off will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Ashtray(s)
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the
accessory power outlets.
Front Ashtray
With the full floor console, the ashtray is located
below the climate control system. To open, push down
and then release the cover. To clean the ashtray,
push the lip of the ashtray to remove it. Push the
opposite side of the ashtray’s lip to install.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
For vehicles without the floor console, pull the tray
located below the climate controls to reveal the ashtray.
The ashtray can be removed by pulling on the ledge
located at the top of the ashtray.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Ashtray
Climate Controls
The ashtrays are located on the door armrests.
To use an ashtray, lift the lid.
Dual Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle
can be controlled with this system. To avoid window
fogging on rainy and humid days at temperatures
above freezing, run the air conditioning. Also, it is best
to avoid the use of recirculation mode except when
maximum air conditioning performance is needed for
a short amount of time to avoid exterior odors and
fogging.
Analog Clock
The analog clock is located on the instrument
panel above the radio. The clock is not connected
with any other vehicle system and runs by itself.
To adjust the clock:
1. Locate the adjustment button directly below the
clock face.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Holding the button down will
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the
button before reaching the desired time.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time
by one minute increments until the desired time
is reached.
Dual Climate Control System
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 68°F (21°C) and 78°F (26°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting
will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced
fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system starts out
blowing air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain
the chosen temperature setting. The length of time
needed to warm the interior depends on the outside
temperature and temperature of the vehicle.
Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles
with Rear Climate Control
4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to stabilize
in order for the system to regulate automatically.
Then adjust the temperature as necessary to
find your comfort setting.
Automatic Operation
AUTO 9(Automatic Fan): When this position is
selected on the fan control, the system adjusts the fan
speed. If the OnStar® system is activated when this
position is selected, the climate control fan speed
will lower.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later
in this section.
After the vehicle is started, the display will show
the interior temperature settings and the outside
temperature.
AUTO (Automatic Mode):
1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.
2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or mode
control, the system automatically controls the air
conditioning compressor. The A/C compressor will
run automatically even at cool outside temperatures
in order to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicator light
is lit when the system is operating automatically,
even at near freezing outside temperatures. Press
the A/C button on the fan control to turn off the A/C.
For improved window clearing performance in defog or
defrost modes, the A/C compressor runs automatically.
Manual Operation
9(Fan): Turn the left control knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the fan speed. Turning
this control completely counterclockwise will turn on
the automatic fan operation. Turning this control to the
“O” position will turn the climate control system off.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter may
need to be replaced. See Passenger Compartment
h(AUTO RECIRCULATION): If the AUTO
position is selected on either the fan or mode control,
the system automatically controls the air inlet to
supply fresh outside air or recirculate the interior
air to cool the car faster. The indicator light on the
recirculation button will light whenever the system
switches to recirculation. You may force outside air
by pressing the recirculation button when the light is lit.
For vehicles without rear climate controls, press the
outside air button to force outside air. The next
time AUTO fan or mode is selected, the air inlet will
reset back to AUTO operation.
9(Off): Turn the left control knob to this position to
turn the entire climate control system off. Outside air
still enters the vehicle and is directed to the floor.
The airflow direction and temperature can be adjusted,
as indicated below.
If the temperature is adjusted while the system is off,
the display will light to show the current settings.
Mode Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to turn on
the automatic delivery mode operation.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F(Vent): Turn the control to this mode to direct air to
?(Recirculation): Press this button to recirculate
cabin air through the vehicle. An indicator light below the
button comes on to show that this mode is activated.
This mode can be used to prevent outside air and
odors from entering the vehicle or to help cool the air
inside the vehicle more quickly. This mode cannot
be selected while in the defog or defrost modes.
If you try to select the recirculation mode, the indicator
light flashes three times and turns off.
the instrument panel outlets.
*(Bi-Level): Turn the control to this mode to direct
approximately half of the air to the instrument panel
outlets and most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
7(Floor): Turn the control to this mode to direct
most of the air to the floor outlets with some air
directed to the side window outlets and the windshield.
Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity
and cool outside temperatures may result in increased
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced,
select the defrost mode.
If recirculation is selected, it only stays on for
three minutes to reduce windshield fogging.
wx (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Press these
buttons next to the fan control to manually increase
or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
The mode control can also be used to select the floor/
defog mode. In this mode, the system automatically
uses outside air. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
wx (Passenger’s Temperature Controls): Press
these buttons next to the mode control to manually
increase or decrease the temperature for the front
passenger. If the passenger’s climate control system
is off, pressing one of these buttons turns it on.
:(Outside Air): Press this button to allow outside
air to come into the vehicle. Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on or off. When the button is pressed,
the indicator light comes on. Pressing the recirculation
button will cancel this mode.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press this
button to turn the passenger’s climate control systems
on or off. When the passenger’s climate control system
is on, the passenger’s temperature setting is displayed.
The temperature selected by the front passenger also
controls the rear system air temperature unless the rear
seat passengers select their own comfort setting.
Sensors
If the PASS button is pressed to turn the passenger
temperature setting off, the driver’s temperature knob
will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.
AUX: If your vehicle has a rear climate control system,
press this button to turn the rear climate control fan
on for automatic operation. After the AUX button
is pressed, the indicator light comes on. Press the button
again to turn the auxiliary fan off. See Rear Climate
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middle
of the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation.
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not
work properly.
#(Air Conditioning): Press the center of the left
control knob to override the automatic system and turn
the air conditioning system on or off. When in AUTO,
the air conditioning compressor comes on automatically,
as necessary.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water may drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
located next to the steering
wheel that measures the
temperature of the air
inside your vehicle.
The climate control system uses the information
from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting
by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and
the air delivery mode. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed
to maintain cool outlet temperatures.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog from your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could
cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
W (Floor/Defog): Turn the control to this mode to
direct approximately half of the air to the floor outlets
and the remaining air is directed to the side window
outlets and to the windshield. When you select
In order to prevent false temperature readings at startup,
the displayed temperature will not change until the
following occurs:
this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs
the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in the floor/defog mode.
• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 km/h)
for 5 minutes.
• Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 km/h)
for 2 and a half minutes.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when
the rear window defogger is on.
0 (Defrost): Turn the control to this mode to direct
most of the air to the windshield and the side window
outlets. In this mode, the system automatically turns off
recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost
mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flow
through the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, press the
AUX button on the front climate control system so
that the light is not lit.
Outlet Adjustment
For the front outlets, use the thumbwheel located
below each outlet to change the direction of the airflow.
Use the thumbwheel located next to the outlets to shut
the airflow or to open the outlets and re-direct the air.
Rear Window Defogger
For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right and up
or down to change the direction of the airflow.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Operation Tips
< (Rear Defogger): Press the center of the right
control to turn the rear window defogger on or off.
Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear window
as possible. The rear window defogger will turn off
approximately 20 minutes after the button is pressed
if your vehicle is moving at slower vehicle speeds.
At higher vehicle speeds, the rear defogger may stay
on continuously. Each additional press will run the
defogger for approximately 10 minutes.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The control panel for this system is located on the
back of the center console.
Rear Climate Control System
Press the AUX button located on the front climate
control panel to turn the rear climate control system on
or off. When turned on the rear system operates in
automatic mode and the temperature settings selected
for the front climate control panel will also be selected
for the rear passengers.
To adjust the rear climate control system, the rear
passenger can select a different temperature, mode
or fan speed.
Whenever the rear passengers have adjusted settings
on the rear climate control system, the AUX light is lit
on the front climate control system.
When the front climate control system is turned off or in
defrost mode, the rear climate control system is turned
off. The rear system will turn back on once another front
mode is selected.
If your vehicle has a rear climate control system,
the rear seat passengers can adjust the direction of
the airflow, fan speed and temperature for the rear
seating area. This system also works with the main
climate control system in the vehicle.
For more information on how to use the climate control
For more information on the air outlets, see Outlet
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation
«N ª(Mode): Press these buttons to change the
air delivery mode. If in AUTO air delivery mode, pressing
the up arrow button will cancel automatic operation
and place the system in manual mode.
«A ª(Fan): Press this button until AUTO appears
on the display to place the system in automatic
mode. When automatic operation is active, the system
automatically controls the fan speed. If in auto fan
mode, pressing the up arrow button will cancel
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. If in auto mode, pressing the down arrow will
turn the rear climate control system off.
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the upper outlets.
%(Bi-Level): This mode splits the air between
the upper outlets and the floor outlets.
[(Floor): This mode directs the air to the floor outlets.
«N ª(Mode): Press the this button until AUTO
appears on the display to place the system in automatic
mode. When automatic operation is active, the system
automatically controls the air delivery mode.
For more information on how to use the front climate
control system, see Dual Climate Control System
on page 3-40.
For more information on the air outlets, see Outlet
under the front seats clear of any objects so that the
air inside of the vehicle can circulate effectively.
Manual Operation
«A ª(Fan): Press these up or down arrow buttons
to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
«b ª(Temperature): Press these up or down
arrow buttons to increase or decrease the temperature
for the rear seat passengers. Once the rear setting
temperature is altered from following the front setting
temperature, it will no longer follow changes to the
front setting temperature until the front climate control
AUX button resets it.
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of
the pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your
vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it may need to be
changed periodically. For how often to change the
passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood near the windshield,
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To access the passenger compartment air filter, do the
following:
1. Use a tool to gently pry the cover up. If your vehicle
has tabs that allow you to unlatch the cover with
your fingers, you will not need a tool for this step.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin located
on the inboard side of the air filter compartment
to carefully pry the pin out.
3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between the
air filter and the compartment wall on the outboard
side of the vehicle. Then, push in to flatten the
pin holding the air filter in place. Gently remove the
air filter and any loose debris that may be inside
the air filter compartment.
4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you hear
a click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap the
cover into place.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and
even dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
for more information.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you
are familiar with this section, you should not be
alarmed when this happens.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-69 for more information.
This gage indicates
the engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works together
with the driver information center. You can set a
Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See “Trip Fuel” under
information.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total
of the old odometer.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would
only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See
information. The passenger safety belt light, located
on the instrument panel, will come on and stay on for
several seconds and then flash for several more.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The light should go out
and the system is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you start the engine. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem
with the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information
Center (DIC) message may also come on. See DIC
information.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front passenger’s seat if the airbag is
turned on.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,
to let you know the status to let you know the status of
the right front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbags.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is or airbags are off.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-55 for more on this, including
important safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
more on this, including important safety information.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
on the ignition, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
for more information. This light could indicate that you
have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
engine on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this
light will come on
briefly when you
start the engine.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is
still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
{CAUTION:
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-58
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
all brake related DIC messages.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
For vehicles that
have the StabiliTrak®
system, this warning
light should come on
briefly when the engine
is started.
The traction control
system warning light
should come on briefly
when the engine
is started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving,
there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system
and your vehicle may need service. When this warning
light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when
the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
information.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there
may be a problem with your traction control system
and your vehicle may need service. When this warning
light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when
the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
for more information.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lane Departure Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Your vehicle may have
the lane departure
warning system.
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on when
the engine is very hot.
This light will also come on briefly when the vehicle
is started.
This light will come on green, briefly, when the vehicle
is started to show that it is working. This light will
also come on green if the system detects a left or
right lane marking. This light will change to amber
and flash and three beeps will sound if you cross
a detected lane marking without using your turn
signal. For more information, see the Index in the
Navigation Manual.
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
cooling system. Driving with engine coolant temperature
light on could cause your vehicle to overheat, see
more information.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
This gage shows
the engine coolant
temperature.
It indicates when the engine has warmed up and if
the cooling system is operating properly. If the gage
pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine
coolant is too hot and the engine coolant temperature
warning light will come on. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-25 for more information.
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center
(DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC Warnings
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light will flash for approximately 60 seconds
and then stay on solid for the remainder of the ignition
for more information.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine
is not running. If the light does not come on, have
it repaired. This light also comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following can prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed
up. This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if you have recently replaced the battery
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Light
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-19.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Fog Lamp Light
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
This light will come on
briefly when you start
your engine. If it does
not, have your vehicle
serviced.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that
oil is not flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights On Reminder
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Gage
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The fuel gage shows
approximately how
much fuel is in the tank.
It works only when
the engine is on.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC
is also used to display warning/status messages.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below the
tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons are
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear in the Driver Information Center
and a single chime will sound. See DIC Warnings
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle system
information and the warning/status messages. The
bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometer on
the left side. The bottom line of the DIC display also
shows a digital speedometer on the right side.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle
the customization features.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) has different
displays which can be
accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, to the
left of the steering wheel.
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
yz Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up
and down the menu items.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu
Items” following for more information on these displays.
can be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:
TRIP A or TRIP B
These displays show the current distance traveled since
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to
zero separately by pressing and holding the set/reset
button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle
Information Display Menu Items” following for more
information on these displays.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL RANGE
INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based
on the current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, the display
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway,
the number may change even though you still have the
same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces
better fuel economy than city driving.
This display shows the current fuel economy in
either miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number reflects only the fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now and will change frequently
as driving conditions change. Unlike average economy,
this display cannot be reset.
FUEL USED
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.
To reset this display, press the set/reset button.
The display will return to zero.
Once the range drops below an estimated
40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will show
FUEL RANGE LOW.
TIMER ON/OFF
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel button
until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
more information.
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until
TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.
AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again
until TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop and
display the end timing value.
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number
of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this
display was reset. To reset this display, press the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset button
after the timer has been stopped. The display will
return to zero.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVERAGE SPEED
Vehicle Information Display Menu Items
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in
either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
This average is calculated based on the various vehicle
speeds recorded since the last reset of this display.
To reset this display, press the set/reset button. The
display will return to zero.
T (Vehicle Information): The following display
menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle
information button:
OIL LIFE REMAINING
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil
life remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil
life remains.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
This display shows the current battery voltage.
If the voltage is in the normal range, the value will
display. For example, the display may read BATTERY
VOLTAGE 13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display
will show LOW. If the voltage is high, the display will
show HIGH. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates
voltage based on the state of the battery. The battery
voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on
the DIC. This is normal. See Charging System Light
on page 3-58 for more information.
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
You should change the oil as soon as possible.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring
the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended
in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC will display a message. See DIC Warnings
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, See Engine Oil
100% when the system is reset.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNITS
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
This display allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH
or METRIC units.
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this display allows the system to be turned on
or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to
select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system
will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be
turned off. When the SBZA system is turned off, the DIC
will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF
message as a reminder that the system has been turned
PARKING ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allows the system
to be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the
set/reset button to select between ON or OFF. If you
choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you choose
OFF, the system will be turned off. The UFRPA system
automatically turns back on after each vehicle start.
When the UFRPA system is turned off and the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will display the
PARKING ASSIST OFF message as a reminder that
the system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings
information.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays
FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press
the vehicle information button again until the DIC
displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by
the system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
more information.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match
an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
1. Press the vehicle information button until
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from
the screen for further use. To clear a message, press
the set/reset button.
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear,
not the problem.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
on the first transmitter at the same time for
about 15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
more information.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
more information.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle
the key to LOCK/OFF.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
which tire needs to be checked. You can receive more
than one tire pressure message at a time. To read
the other messages that may have been sent at
the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading Information
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel button until
BATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required for
your vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil
for more information.
CLEAN RADAR
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) system are disabled because the radar is blocked
and cannot detect vehicles in your path. It may also
activate during heavy rain or due to road spray. To clean
the system, see “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system,
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEAN SIDE BLIND ZONE
ALERT SYSTEM
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may
be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This
message may also display during heavy rain or due
to road spray. Your vehicle does not need service.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle
for more information.
with this message.
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)
ENGINE HOT – A/C (Air
Conditioning) OFF
This message displays whenever the cruise control is
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
after a few seconds, this message clears and the
message “SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the
DIC. See “SET SPD (Speed)” later in this section.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-25 for more information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
This message displays when the engine has overheated.
Immediately look for a safe place to pull your vehicle
over and turn the engine off right away to avoid severe
on page 5-27. A chime also sounds when this message
is displayed.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message displays when the engine power is being
reduced to protect the engine from damage. There could
be several malfunctions that might cause this message.
Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability
to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but acceleration and
speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOLLOWING GAP
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This symbol appears
with this message.
This symbol appears with this message.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single chime
sounds when this message is displayed. See Filling the
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
this message displays to show the follow distance that
has been set. There are six follow distances to choose
from. Each follow distance is shown on the DIC by
displaying from one to six bars between two car symbols.
information.
HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF
This message displays when you manually turn off
the heated washer fluid system or when the system
automatically turns off. See “Heated Washer Fluid”
information.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID
WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when you turn on the heated
washer fluid system. See “Heated Washer Fluid” under
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system, this message may display if the LDW system
does not activate due to a temporary condition. See Lane
HOOD OPEN
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears
with this message.
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when the hood is not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS
PEDAL APPLIED
PARKING ASSIST OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK (P), this message displays to remind
the driver that the UFRPA system has been turned
off. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn
the UFRPA system back on, see “PARKING ASSIST”
on page 2-44 for more information.
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) is engaged and you are pressing the
accelerator pedal enough to disable ACC automatic
more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure
A multiple chime sounds when this message is
information.
This message displays when the passenger side front
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible when this message is displayed.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system will not activate due to a
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require
service. If this message appears when you attempt
to activate the system, continue driving for several
minutes and then try activating the system again.
information.
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-5.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears
with this message.
RAINSENSE WIPERS ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II wipers, this message
displays while this feature is active. See Rainsense™
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
page 3-69 for more information.
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. The brake system warning light and
the antilock brake system warning light may also be
displayed on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake
If this happens, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is displayed or
appears again when you begin driving, the brake system
needs service. See your dealer/retailer as soon as
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
This message displays when the air delivery mode
door or the electronic sensors that control the air
conditioning and heating systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system serviced by your
dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and
air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays if the ignition is on to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have
the brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. The charging
system light also displays on the instrument panel
more information. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system, this message may display to indicate that the
LDW system is not working properly. If this message
remains on after continued driving, the system needs
service. See your dealer/retailer. See Lane Departure
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this message displays
if there is a problem with the UFRPA system. Do not
use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic Front
more information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and this message displays, both SBZA displays
will remain on indicating there is a problem with the
SBZA system. If these displays remain on after
continued driving, the system needs service. See your
for more information.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist
SERVICE STABILITRAK
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
on page 4-7.
This message displays if a problem is detected with
the speed variable assist steering system. When
this message is displayed, you may notice that the
effort required to steer the vehicle decreases or feels
lighter, but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® system.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back
on. If this message still stays on or comes back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the StabiliTrak® system inspected by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) system are disabled and need service.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when the magnetic ride
control or automatic leveling control system is not
operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS). When this message is
displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service.
more information.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key.
A fault has been detected in the system which means
that the system is disabled and it is not protecting
the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you
may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with
the vehicle’s transmission. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-62. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-62 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SET SPD (Speed)
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this
message displays whenever the cruise control is set.
First, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” message
appears. After a few seconds, the “CRUISE SET TO
XXX MPH (km/h)” message clears and the message
“SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the DIC.
See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” earlier in
for more information.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA
system has been turned off. See Side Blind Zone Alert
page 3-69 for more information.
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when your vehicle speed
is limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed variable assist
steering, magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling
control systems. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-19 for more information.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message may
display and the Traction Control System and
StabiliTrak® Warning Light on the instrument panel
cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle
and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The StabiliTrak® system is not functional until the
on page 4-7 for more information.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it
is on and tightened properly.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead
to costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned
after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until the transmission cools down or until this
message is removed.
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-5 for more information.
TRUNK OPEN
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned on. See Traction Control
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURN SIGNAL ON
DIC Vehicle Customization
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple chime
sounds when this message is displayed.
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
This symbol appears with
this message.
The default settings for the customization features
were set when your vehicle left the factory, but
may have been changed from their default state
since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
2. Press the customization button to enter the
feature settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow
you to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear
to English.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors
automatically lock when the doors are closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for three seconds.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See
on page 2-5 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. When
locking the doors with the power door lock switch and a
door is open, this feature will delay locking the doors
until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay
on for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPROACH LIGHTING
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a
normal level.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the
lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or
the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry
information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
EASY EXIT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
page 1-4 for more information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing
the easy exit seat button.
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
BUTTON AND KEY OUT (default): If the features are
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle has the
power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature, the
power steering column will move up and forward when
the key is removed from the ignition or after pressing
the easy exit seat button.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.
If the automatic movement has already occurred, and
you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,
the seat and steering column will stay in the original
exit position, unless a memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
TILT ONLY: The steering wheel tilt feature will recall.
The current setting will remain.
TELESCOPE ONLY: The steering column telescope
feature will recall.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
SEAT/TILT: The driver’s seat and the steering wheel tilt
feature will recall.
EASY EXIT SETUP
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic
easy exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
earlier for more information.
SEAT/TELESCOPE: The driver’s seat and the steering
column telescope feature will recall.
TILT/TELESCOPE: The steering wheel tilt and steering
column telescope features will recall.
ALL (default): The driver’s seat and the steering wheel
tilt and steering column telescope features will recall,
if your vehicle has this option.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.
SEAT ONLY: The driver’s seat will recall.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
on page 1-4 for more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will
automatically move to the stored driving position
when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed. The steering column
will also move on vehicles with the power tilt and
telescopic steering feature. See Power Tilt Wheel and
information. See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY” under
information on matching transmitters to driver
ID numbers.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
{CAUTION:
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
are pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Setting the Time
Radio with a Single CD or a Six-Disc
CD Player
Your vehicle has an analog clock as well as the
digital radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery,
the digital radio clock display should be disabled.
If you decide to use the digital radio clock as well as
the analog clock, you can change the setting to enable
the radio clock display.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio,
make sure that it can be added by checking with
your dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added.
Enabling/Disabling the Digital
Radio Clock
For the Single CD Player
Turn the radio clock display on or off by following
these steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can
be played even after the ignition is turned off.
for more information.
2. Press the H (clock) button until the clock and date
setting menus appear.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow label until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
For a Six-Disc CD Player
Turn the radio clock display on or off by following
these steps:
4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle
the radio clock display on or off.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button until the H (clock) label
option is displayed
3. Press the pushbutton located under the H label
until the clock and date settings appear.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then
returns to the original clock display menu.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow label until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
5. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to
toggle the radio clock display on or off.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen
displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds. The
menus for clock and date settings are removed,
and ON displays as a current status indicating that
the clock display can be turned on, if desired.
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.
Occasionally you might need to set the digital radio
clock using the procedure below to synchronize
both clocks.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then
returns to the original clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen
displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds. The
menus for clock and date settings are removed,
and ON displays as a current status indicating
that the clock display can be turned on, if desired.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For a Six-Disc CD Player
Setting the Time and Date
For the Single CD Player
This type of radio has a MENU button for setting the
time and date. To set the time and date, do the
following:
This type of radio has a H (clock) button for setting
the time and date. To set the time and date,
do the following:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button until the H label option
1. Turn the radio on.
is displayed.
2. Press the H button and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
3. Press the pushbutton located under the H label
and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year) displays.
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date
if selected, increases by one.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date
if selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right SEEK arrow or the
\FWD (forward) button.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right SEEK arrow or the
\FWD button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the sREV (reverse) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left
You can also turn the a (tune) knob, located
on the upper right side of the radio faceplate,
to adjust the selected setting.
SEEK arrow or the sREV button. You
can also turn the a (tune) knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio faceplate,
to adjust the selected setting.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Six-Disc CD Player
Changing the Time and Date
Default Setting
For the Single CD Player
To change the time and date default setting, do the
following:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/
year to day/month/year, by pressing the MENU
button.
To change the time and date default setting, do the
following:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/
2. Once the H (clock) label displays, press the
pushbutton located under that label until the
time and date settings display along with a
forward arrow.
year to day/month/year, by pressing the H (clock)
button.
2. Once the clock and date settings display along with
the forward arrow, press the pushbutton located
under the forward arrow until the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow until the time 12H and 24H, and the
date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the H button again to apply
the selected default, or let the screen time out.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the MENU button again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen
time out.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect information that causes
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio(s) (MP3)
Playing the Radio
O(Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as you speed up or slow down while driving.
That way, the volume level should sound about the
same as you drive. To activate SCV:
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
Radio Data System (RDS)
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies
upon receiving specific information from these stations
and only works when the information is available.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
AudioPilot®: If your vehicle has the Bose® audio
system, it has AudioPilot® noise compensation
technology.
To use AudioPilot®, do the following steps:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). The selection displays.
a (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the next or
to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
three seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes
to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
AUTO VOLUM label on the radio display.
4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn this feature
on or off.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press this button
to display additional text information related to the
current FM-RDS or XM™ (if equipped) station, or
MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional information such
as: Channel, Song, Artist, CAT (category) can display.
Continue pressing the information button to highlight
the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned
under any one of the labels and the information
about that label displays.
When turned ON, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the
audio system equalization, to compensate for
background noise, so that your music always sounds
the same at the set volume level.
The feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well
you hear the music being played through your vehicle’s
audio system. At high volume settings there might be little
or no adjustments by AudioPilot®. For more information
on AudioPilot®, visit www.bose.com/audiopilot.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is in PARK (P). Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
To store a station as a favorite, perform the following
steps:
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,
to return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the a (tune)
knob until the tone control labels display. Continue
pressing to highlight the desired label, or press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired label.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Bose® amplified radio, perform the following
steps to setup the equalization settings:
Turn the a knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can
also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
1. Press the a knob until the DSP (Digital Signal
\FWD (forward), or sREV (reverse) button until
the desired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency
is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
Processing) label displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label
to get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, and Surround,
to display.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
setting.
To select Surround, press either the fourth or fifth
pushbutton located under the displayed Surround
until Centerpoint displays.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the a knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
To return to the manual mode, press the tune knob.
Select either BASS, MID, or TREB and start to manually
adjust the settings by turning the a knob.
EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose® amplified radio,
perform the following steps to setup the equalization
settings:
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,
1. Press the a knob until the equalization label
press the a (tune) knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired
label. Turn the a knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can
be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow, \FWD,
displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the equalization
label to get choices of POP, ROCK, CTRY (country),
TALK, JAZZ, and CLAS (classical), to display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
setting.
or sREV buttons until the desired levels are obtained.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE
label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the
level adjusts to the middle position.
• Rear: Select this screen button to adjust the audio
for the rear seat passengers to receive the best
possible sound quality.
• Surround (Centerpoint®): Select this screen button
to enable Bose Centerpoint® signal processing
circuitry. Centerpoint® produces a full vehicle
surround sound listening experience from a CD,
MP3/WMA, or XM stereo digital audio source and
delivers five independent audio channels from
conventional two channel stereo recordings.
(Not available for AM, FM, or auxiliary sources.)
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the a knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
This feature is used to provide a choice of four different
listening experiences. DSP can be used while listening
to the audio system or a CD. To change the DSP mode,
press the a (tune) knob until the DSP control label
displays. Press the pushbutton located under the
DSP label until the control labels display. Continue by
pressing the desired button below the control labels
on the display.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) is only available on
vehicles that have the Bose® Premium audio system.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ (if equipped) stations while the radio is in the
XM™ mode. To find XM™ (if equipped) channels
within a desired category, perform the following:
For more information on the control label displays,
see the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ (if equipped)
frequency displays. Press the CAT button to display
the category labels. Continue pressing the CAT
button until the desired category name displays.
Another way to select a category is to press
• Norm (Normal): Select this screen button to
adjust the audio for normal mode. This provides
the best sound quality for all seating positions.
• Driv (Driver): Select this screen button to adjust
the audio for the driver to receive the best
possible sound quality.
the sREV or \FWD button until the desired
category is selected.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press either of the two pushbuttons below the
desired category label to immediately tune to
the first XM™ (if equipped) station associated with
that category.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
3. Turn the a knob, press the pushbuttons below the
displayed right or left arrows, or press either SEEK
arrow to go to the previous or the next XM™
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
(if equipped) station within the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display your favorites
again.
The radio does not let you remove or add categories
while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The CAT button also toggles between compressed
and uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present.
See “Compressed Audio” later in this section.
Undesired XM™ (if equipped) categories can be
removed through the setup menu. To remove an
undesired category, perform the following:
Radio Message
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
Locked: This message displays when the THEFTLOCK
system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer for service.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
3. Turn the a knob to display the category you
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
want removed.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
Care of Your CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play the track number displays.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button for five seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, press and hold
for two seconds to eject all discs, if one or more
discs are loaded.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
a (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
LOAD ^: Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the CD.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press again to turn off random play.
4 (Information): Press to switch the display between
the track number, elapsed time of the track, and the
time. When the ignition is off, press to display the time
(if the clock display is enabled). See “Enabling/Disabling
page 3-96 for more information.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound
at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing
the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD tracks
can be played in random, rather than sequential
order. This feature is not available in playlist mode.
To use random, do the following:
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing.
The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.
1. To play tracks in random order from the CD that is
currently playing, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label. The random icon displays.
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random
play. The random icon is no longer highlighted.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device
Found” displays.
RDM (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):
With the random setting, CD tracks can be played
in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD or
all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one
of the following:
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc,
• To play the tracks in random order from the CD that
is currently playing, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Randomize Current Disc
displays. Press again to turn off random play.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located
on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not
an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. You can however, connect
an external audio device such as an iPod, laptop
computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape
player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the CD
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• The radio system does not support the playlist
format, the compressed audio format, or the data
file format.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input
jack. When connecting an auxiliary device, the radio
automatically detects the device and “Aux Input Device”
displays. The device begins playing audio over the
vehicle speakers. If an auxiliary device has already
been connected, the device does not begin playing
audio until the radio’s CD/AUX button is pressed.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
O(Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. You might need to do additional
volume adjustments from the portable device.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it
or power it off.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing the
CAT (category) button toggles between compressed and
uncompressed audio format.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device Found” displays.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
Using an MP3
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,
and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist
name, and album can display when files are recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a
Empty Directory or Folder
large number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on
the display, potentially getting cut off.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
No Folder
Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the a knob, or the
SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was
recorded using no file folders can also be played. If a
CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you
access and navigate up to the maximum, but all items
over the maximum cannot be accessed.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
File System and Naming
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the
following order:
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
− Playlists can be changed by pressing
the S c and c T folder buttons,
the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files. Playlists
must have a file extension of PLS, M3U, or WPL.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track
of the first folder.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c and
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode has been chosen as the default
display. The new track name displays.
c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK
arrows. Tracks cannot be changed. Songs are played
sequentially; press the sREV or \FWD to reverse
or advance through the currently playing song.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow
is held or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through MP3/WMA files
on the CD.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If it is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into
the player and begins playing.
cT(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
sREV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R currently playing.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs
in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
have played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. If you want to
listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press
the pushbutton located below either arrow button.
The CD goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist displays.
1. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize
All Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below
the Back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name displays on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album begins to play. Once all songs from that album
have played, the player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It may take several minutes to scan
the disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA
files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might
begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the
background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
To exit music navigator mode, press the button below
the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside
the radio for future listening.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number displays
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again
and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input
Device Found” displays.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM TheftLocked: The XM™ receiver in the vehicle
may have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message appears after
having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended
to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone,
no matter how advanced, can never replace your
own judgment. See the Navigation System manual for
some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID
label. This label is needed to activate the service.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it does not operate and LOC, LOCK, or
LOCKED could display.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is playing, press the down or up arrow to go
to the next or to the previous track.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
The audio steering
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press this button to
silence the system. Press this button again or turn the
volume knob to turn the sound on.
Press and hold this button to interact with the OnStar®
system. If your vehicle is also equipped with the
navigation system, push this button to initiate voice
recognition and say, “OnStar” to enter OnStar® mode,
for more information.
wheel controls may be
different depending on
your vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel. They
include the following:
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the index of your vehicle’s navigation
system manual for more information.
xw (Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrow
to go to the next or to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
AM, FM, or XM (if equipped), radio, or CD.
The radio has up to six favorites pages and five presets
to each favorites page. If favorites page one is activated,
press the up arrow to go to the next preset radio station.
Press the up arrow multiple times to go through all five
presets. Once all five presets have played, press the up
arrow again to go to favorites page two.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus button
to increase or to decrease the volume.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next
radio station and stay there. The system only seeks
radio stations with strong frequencies.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
When the seek arrow is pressed and held for
two seconds, the system scans the radio stations
that are in the selected band. If listening to a CD,
the system advances to the next CD when multiple
discs are inserted.
If you have the navigation system, some of the audio
steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing
in the navigation radio. See the Navigation System
manual for more information.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or
static, unplug the item from the accessory
power outlet.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or through tunnels could
cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time. The radio
may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make
sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not
damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines
to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road,
and Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a driver who
will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time
to cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear
out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on,
and you might even notice that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, the
pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops,
you will still have some power brake assist. But you will
use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up,
it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be
harder to push.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You
slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make
the most of available tire and road conditions. This
can help you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that the
front wheels are spinning too much or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the system works the front
brakes and reduces engine power (by closing the throttle
and managing engine spark) to limit wheel spin.
The traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning
light will flash when the traction control system is limiting
wheel spin. See Traction Control System (TCS)
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-16 for more information.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
hear the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message, the
traction control system warning light and the StabiliTrak®
warning light will come on to let you know if there
is a problem with the traction control system.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL message are on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to.
Magnetic Ride Control
Your vehicle may have a feature called Magnetic Ride
Control that automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle.
Automatic ride control is achieved through a computer
used to control and monitor the suspension system.
The controller receives input from various sensors to
determine the proper system response. If the controller
detects a problem within the system, the DIC will display
a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. See DIC
information. If this message appears, have your
vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer.
You can turn the system on or off at any time by pressing
the traction control system button located on the console
or on the end of the column shifter. The DIC will display
TRACTION CONTROL OFF when you press the button,
and part of the traction control system is disabled. Your
vehicle will still have brake-traction control, but will not
be able to use the engine speed management system.
You may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on. If the controller detects
excessive wheel spin in this mode, the traction control
system and StabiliTrak® indicator light may blink.
Electronically Controlled Air Ride
Suspension
If you have a Professional Vehicle, you may have a
feature called Electronically Controlled Air Suspension.
Air ride control is achieved through a computer used to
control and monitor the system. The controller receives
input from two height sensors to determine the proper
system response. If the controller detects a problem
with the system, the Driver Information Center (DIC)
will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message.
If this message appears, have your vehicle serviced at
your dealer/retailer.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you may want to “rock” your vehicle
in an attempt to free it. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed
and the traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning
light on the instrument panel cluster will come on if there
is a problem with the system. When this light and the
SERVICE STABILITRAK message are on, the system
is not operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Your vehicle may have this feature. The StabiliTrak®
system is an advanced computer controlled system that
helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions. This is accomplished by
selectively applying any one of the vehicle’s brakes
and reducing engine power.
The StabiliTrak® system comes on automatically
whenever you start your vehicle. The system cannot
be turned off.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle may have a panic brake assist system
that monitors the intention of the driver while braking.
If the system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver to
maintain brake application. When this happens the brake
pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let the system work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise but this
is normal. The brakes will return to normal operation after
the brake pedal has been released.
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed in the DIC and the traction control system and
StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrument panel cluster
will be on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding
19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak®
system is off until the light has turned off. This could
take up to 15 minutes.
The traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning light
on the instrument panel cluster will flash when the system
is operating. See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning
page 3-60 for more information. You may also feel or
hear the system working. This is normal.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering System
This system continuously adjusts the effort you feel
when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may be active.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have
ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the
time for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as you can
from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn
it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up
to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may be active.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
{CAUTION:
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has
little or no contact with the road.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean — inside and outside?
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving
tips include:
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Allow extra following distance.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
• Pass with caution.
Have up-to-date maps?
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes
on a steep downhill slope.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
{CAUTION:
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of
sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
The Traction Control System (TCS) improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though you have TCS, slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,
you might want to turn the TCS off, such as when
driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are
near help and you can hike through the snow. Here
are some things to do to summon help and keep
yourself and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too
severe for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn
the traction system off and use the rocking method.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or
stability system. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that could free your
vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out after a
few tries, it might need to be towed out. If your vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-26.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 5-58.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire and
Loading Information label specific to your vehicle
will be provided and installed by the final body
manufacturer. The Tire and Loading Information
label, should be attached to the B-pillar of your
vehicle. See the final stage manufacturer’s manual
or contact them directly. The label shows the
original tires installed on your professional vehicle
and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures
for those tires. The label also tells you the
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
professional vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Item
Total
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” for important information on towing
a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
Occupant Weight
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the vehicle
specific Certification label is provided by the final
stage manufacturer. The coach-builder should be
consulted if the final stage manufacturer’s label is
not present. The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GVWR label should be on the driver’s door edge.
Certification Label
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. This label shows
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
for either the front or rear axle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level
as the load changes. It is automatic, you do
not need to adjust anything.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as
better handling under a variety of passenger and
loading conditions. An air compressor connected
to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of
the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height.
The system is activated when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN and will automatically adjust
vehicle height thereafter. The system may exhaust
(lower vehicle height) for up to ten minutes after
the ignition key has been turned to LOCK/OFF.
You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-13.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this
section for more information.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
Towing a Trailer
The Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a trailer.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow
a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine
and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
What is more, the trailer adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
If You Do Decide To Pull a Trailer
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer/retailer about sway controls.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if
you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the
GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
These are total maximum weights including the load.
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at our
Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the Tire and
page 4-20. Then be sure you do not go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to
tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you will be able to maintain them properly.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the
hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
water can, too.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly
as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing Up
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform,
parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical
connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the
trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets
you check your electrical connection at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your /retailer. The arrows on your instrument panel
will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash,
telling other drivers you are about to turn, change
lanes or stop.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signal when they are not. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift into
PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake.
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (do not
overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake
system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering,
it is a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
• Start your engine,
• Shift into a gear, and
• Make sure the parking brake has released.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-25.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids,
and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you should use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle
than this manual can. To order the proper service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Gasoline Octane
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced,
and you might notice a slight audible knocking
noise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If the
octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This can cause
wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines
additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-63. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries
to you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the center of
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-63.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-73 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-63.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To lift the hood, use the following steps:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located
on the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever, located near the
center of the hood. Move the release lever up
and to the right to raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-97.
Engine Oil
on page 5-40.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on
level ground.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
on page 5-40 Jump Starting.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
on page 5-33.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and
check the level.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap and Dipstick
(Out of View). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 5-19.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
I
of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind
of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could be damaged.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
• GM4718M
Look for this on the oil container, and use only those oils
that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM4718M
and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil
container.
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this
GM standard. Look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements
for your vehicle.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
you need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated
can vary considerably. For the oil life system to
work properly, you must reset the system every time
the oil is changed.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose
of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it
by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message must be reset:
1. Turn the key to the ON/RUN position without
starting the engine.
2. Press the INFO button on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) until OIL LIFE REMAINING is
displayed. See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-69.
3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until
100% is displayed. This resets the oil life indicator.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Loosen and remove the two screws on the top of
the engine air cleaner/filter cover.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an angle
while pulling toward you. This is necessary due
to the two hinges located on the inboard side
of the cover.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and
any loose debris that may be found in the air
cleaner base.
4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow these steps to reinstall the cover to the engine
air cleaner/filter housing:
1. Align the two hinges located on the inboard side
of the cover.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the
engine to engage the tabs in the hinges and
align the two screws.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
3. Tighten the two screws on the top of the engine
air cleaner/filter housing cover.
A good time to check your automatic transmission
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
{CAUTION:
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Fluid Level
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Prepare you vehicle as follows:
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission fluid cap is located next to the radiator
hose and below the engine air cleaner/filter assembly
on the driver’s side of the vehicle, and is marked
TRANS FLUID. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
1. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter assembly
to reach the transmission fluid cap, turn the cap
counterclockwise to remove. Pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds,
and then pull it back out again.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read
the lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way and turn
the handle clockwise. Reinstall the engine
air cleaner/filter assembly.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way and turn the handle
clockwise.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
• Giving freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first,
if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-25.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than two times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant
surge tank is located
toward the rear of
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap — even
a little — when the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark, located on the side of the surge
tank that faces the engine.
For more information on location, see Engine
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only
when the engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
You will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
message displayed in the Driver Information Center
for more information. You will also hear a chime.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure to turn
the cap until it clicks.
There is also an engine temperature warning light
and/or gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam
or coolant before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine
is overheated, the liquids in it can catch
fire. You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE is
displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and
engine performance. This operating mode allows your
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency.
Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in
the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on,
you can drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-13.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If you still have
the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later
in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
on page 5-27 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak fixed before
you drive the vehicle.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is
visible but the level is not at the FULL COLD mark
located on the side of the surge tank, add enough
of a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank to
bring the level to the FULL COLD mark, but be
sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
information.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed.
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant
surge tank with the
proper mixture to
the FULL COLD mark
on the side of the
coolant surge tank.
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar
4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower,
add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark
on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the cap. Be sure the cap is hand-tight
and fully seated.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
The power steering fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
reservoir is located next
to the underhood fuse
block on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-73 for more information.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added
when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done
on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location
and access.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you
should have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since
a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will
not work well.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low,
the SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message will be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Pedal Travel
{CAUTION:
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for
the worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer
for one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label.
A battery that is not properly vented can let
sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the
rear seat cushion. These fumes can damage
your rear seat safety belt systems. You may
not be able to see this damage, and the safety
belts might not provide the protection needed
in a crash. If a replacement battery is ever
needed, it must be vented in the same manner
as the original battery. Always make sure that
the vent hose is properly reattached before
reinstalling the seat cushion.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion.
To access the battery, see Rear Underseat Fuse
battery to jump start your vehicle. See Jump Starting
on page 5-40.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
page 5-40 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached,
the vent hose connectors (B) must be securely
reattached to the vent outlets (C) on each side of
the battery, and the vent assembly grommet (D)
must be secured to the floor pan (E).
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps
to do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4.6L LD8 Engine shown,
4.6L L37 Engine similar
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other
vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)
jump starting terminal and a remote negative (−)
jump starting terminal.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. Lift the red plastic cap to access
the terminal. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on the location
of the remote positive (+) terminal.
A second remote positive (+) terminal is located on
the rear underseat fuse block.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located behind
the power steering pulley, near the engine cover.
It is marked GND (−).
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located under the rear passenger’s
seat. You will not need to access the battery
for jump starting. The remote terminals are for
that purpose.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Do not let the other end of the cable touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to
a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remote
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with
the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle
with the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to
its original position.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you,
this may also mean the vertical aim needs to be
adjusted.
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need
to be re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
for more information.
The vehicle should:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
2. Find the center line running through the lens of
the headlamp.
• Have all tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its original location in
the vehicle.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the center
line running through the lens of the headlamp.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of the
vehicle at the wall where it was marked in Step 4.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws. They
are located under the hood near each headlamp
assembly. First lift the flap to access either of them.
Each one is the top outboard screw by the “ V” on
the cover panel next to the aiming flap.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm hex wrench.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow
only the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower
the angle of the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by
your dealer/retailer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows
the incorrect headlamp aim.
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
service them.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Lift the windshield wiper arm and blade away
from the windshield.
3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point,
and pull the blade assembly down toward the
windshield to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
firmly press down on the clip to snap it into place.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove and replace the wiper blade element do the
following:
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at one
end which are engaged by the bottom claw set of
the wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiper
blade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiper
blade assembly.
2. To replace the element, start at the heel end of the
wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the base of
the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade element,
notched end last, into the wiper blade claw sets.
3. To engage the last claw into the notched end of the
wiper blade element, squeeze the wiper blade
element at the notched area, and push the wiper
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.
A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are
engaged by the last claw set, and that all the other
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the
wiper blade element on both sides.
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,
page 6-14.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your tire warranty
and where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
for inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed driving.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded
into its sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The
letters and numbers following the DOT code are
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN
shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN
is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger Car Tire Example
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The
Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN
is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
Light Truck Tire Example
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a single.
For information on recommended tire pressure
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
Tire Size
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply
construction.
The following illustration shows an example of
a tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel
in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of
the tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load
index can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating
is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of
a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-58.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand, and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-20.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-20.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
on page 4-20.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a
tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which
a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached
to the vehicle’s center pillar. This label lists your
vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure
to operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
load your vehicle affects the vehicle handling
and ride comfort, never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the spare tire. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Professional Vehicle
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
The proper inflation of the tires on your
professional vehicle depends on the type
of tires on it.
• If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires,
the cold inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).
• If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size
tires, the cold inflation pressure depends on
the vehicle mass and should be determined
by the vehicle coach-builder. A Tire and
Loading Information label provided by the
final stage manufacturer should be attached
to the B-pillar on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. If the final stage manufacturer’s label
is not present, the coach-builder should be
consulted. Do not use the tire pressures
indicated on the General Motors label. These
tire pressures are for the incomplete vehicle
and are not the correct tire pressures for
the completed professional vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Operation at inflation pressures below this
recommendation may cause your tires to
become overloaded.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18 size
tires, and you will be driving at speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive
heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you or others could
be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road
conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated
for high speed operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure
for the vehicle load.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires
to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-20.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
for additional information.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected,
the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure
warning light located
on the instrument
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
panel cluster.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At the same time a message to check the pressure
in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by
the driver. For additional information and details about
the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-73.
of the Tire and Loading Information label and its
location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors.
Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is
not covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid
tire sealants.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the correct inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more
of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When
the system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning
light flashes for about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message come on at each
ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the malfunction light
and DIC message to come on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires
on page 5-69.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message comes on and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or more than five minutes to match all four tire and
wheel positions the matching process stops and
you need to start over.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification
codes will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel
positions in the following order: driver side front
tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear
tire, and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic
tool. See your dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time
for approximately five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode
and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays
on the DIC screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure,
do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use
the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match al
l four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than
two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel,
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times
to indicate the sensor identification code has
been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the
TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the
DIC display screen goes off.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
more information.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Tire Rotation Pattern
Five-Tire Rotation Pattern
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should
not be included in the tire rotation process.
Use the four-tire rotation pattern shown.
A five-tire rotation pattern may be used for your
professional vehicle, if it has a full-size spare tire
and wheel assembly that matches the original
equipment tires and wheels in size, type and brand.
The correct five-tire rotation pattern is shown.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) will need to have the sensors
reset after a tire rotation is performed. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make wheel
nuts become loose after time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to
do this; but be sure to use a scraper or
wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-77.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you
get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way,
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the
tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
for additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect
how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you
are unsure about the need to replace your tires as
they get older, consult the tire manufacturer for more
information.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This
is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
for information on proper tire rotation.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire
and wheel assembly. If the vehicle has a
compact spare tire and wheel, they have the
same overall diameter as your vehicle’s full-size
tires and wheels. Because they were designed
and developed for use on your vehicle, it is all
right to drive your vehicle with the compact
spare installed properly. Compact spare
tires are designed for temporary use only.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as
your vehicle’s original tires.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and
its location on your vehicle.
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only
to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some
aluminum wheels can sometimes be repaired.
See your GM dealer/retailer if any of these
conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could
have a collision in which you or others could
be injured. Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Your GM dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels have
a unique offset and bolt hole diameter. Each of the
wheels on the professional vehicle have eight wheels
nuts. The wheels on the non-professional vehicle
page 5-77 for more information.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have
to replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove
the device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak
out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment and
training. The jack provided with your vehicle
is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it
is used for anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips
off the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently
brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction you
would use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way you want the vehicle
to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road
if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
The following information tells you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Grab the handle and
remove the cover.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment needed is in the trunk.
To access the equipment:
for more information.
2. Press the area at
the front of the
handle located on
the cover so that
the back edge
raises.
4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer that holds
the wrench and jack.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and spare tire from
information.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
The tools to be used are the jack (A) and the wheel
wrench (B).
2. For models having aluminum wheels with a center
wheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to gently pry the wheel covers off. Store the wheel
cover and lug nut caps in the trunk until you have the
flat tire repaired or replaced. Be careful not to scratch
the aluminum wheel edge and do not try to remove
it with your hands. Then loosen the wheel nuts with
the wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosen
them using the wheel wrench. Do not remove
them yet.
4. Find the jacking location from the diagram above
and use the corresponding cutouts located in the
plastic molding.
The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm) from
the rear edge of the front wheel well, and the
rear location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm) from the
front edge of the rear wheel well.
The notches may also be labeled JACK with an
arrow pointing to the jacking location on the vehicle.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
6. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly
into the channel of the jack head.
7. Put the spare tire near you.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that
when the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-77.
9. Remove all wheel nuts and the flat tire.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is
held against the hub.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get
new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
nut torque specification.
5-Wheel Nuts
8-Wheel Nuts
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers,
screw the nut covers on with your fingers, then
tighten one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten
the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification. See Capacities
nut torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
B. Wing Nut
C. Retainer
D. Jack and Wheel Wrench
E. Jack Container
F. Spare Tire
G. Bolt
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
1. Open the trunk. See
2. Reinstall the spare
tire (F) making sure to
line up the wheel center
hole with the bolt (G)
and place it on the
After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle,
store the flat tire in your trunk.
compartment floor.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment
in the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised
until the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.
3. Insert the jack
container (E) into the
spare tire (F). Then
insert the jack and
wheel wrench (D) into
the center of the spare
tire making sure to line
up the wheel nut hole
with the bolt (G) on the
compartment floor.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Secure the spare tire and the jack container with
the retainer (C) and then the wing nut (B).
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other
wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and
its wheel together.
5. Reinstall the spare tire cover (A).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains
on your compact spare.
Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire. Although
the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle
was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation
pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have a spare tire, which, when new,
was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose air over time, so
check its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-20 for information regarding proper tire inflation
and loading your vehicle. For instructions on how to
remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is
correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances
up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your
trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good shape in case it is
needed again.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire
and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the
road tire originally installed on your vehicle. This spare
tire was developed for use on your vehicle, so it is all
right to drive on it.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being
cleaned. Permanent damage may result from using
cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended.
Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any
accidental over-spray from other surfaces immediately.
To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the
cleaning cloth.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match
your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size
and type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best
if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible,
dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery.
Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic
surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to
remove particles from your upholstery. It is important
to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining
heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly
as possible. Your vehicle’s interior may experience
extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer
to remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is
a good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed,
a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Covers
Washing Your Vehicle
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
can damage the emblems or nameplates on
your vehicle. Check the cleaning product label.
If it states that is should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on your vehicle or damage may
occur and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a
car washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with
mild soap and lukewarm water.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys,
etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners
that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
Finish Care
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to
keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is
usually needed. However, you may use chrome polish
on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they
are worn or damaged.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle
after driving on roads that have been sprayed
with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride.
These chlorides are used on roads for conditions
such as ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s
chrome with soap and water after exposure.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Sheet Metal Damage
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff
off immediately after application.
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Chrome Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Usage
Vehicle Identification
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches, and
other light surface
contamination.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Cleans, shines,
and protects tires.
No wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN
also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Engine Identification
Spot Lifter
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
engine code.
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if
you ever need to order parts. The label has the
following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on
and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have the headlamp wiring checked right away.
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows,
there is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is
fixed or goes away.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment. Remove the fuse
cover and secondary service cover to access the
fuse block.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Engine Control Module (ECM), Crank
Fuel Injectors Odd
Fuses
Usage
Air Conditioning Clutch
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
Oxygen Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fuel Injectors Even
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Emission Device
Fuses
23
Usage
7
8
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
(J-Case)
Transmission, Ignition 1
24
Starter (J-Case)
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
9
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Motor (J-Case)
25
Climate Control System,
Instrument Panel Cluster Ignition 1
10
26
27
28
Cooling Fan 2 (J-Case)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Airbag System
Cooling Fan 1 (J-Case)
Horn
Windshield Washer Heater (J-Case)
Windshield Wiper
Relays
29
Usage
Powertrain
Fog Lamps
Right High-Beam Headlamp
Left High-Beam Headlamp
Left Low-Beam Headlamp
Right Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Washer Pump Motor
Left Front Cornering Lamp
Right Front Cornering Lamp
Air Pump (J-Case)
30
Starter
31
Cooling Fan 2
32
Cooling Fan 3
33
Cooling Fan 1
34
Air Conditioning Clutch
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
Ignition
35
36
37
Air Pump
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on
the driver side. The rear seat cushion must be removed
to access the rear fuse block.
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a
short that could damage the battery and or wires.
Avoid contact between the rear seat and the
fuse center whenever you remove or reinstall
the rear seat. Do not remove covers from any of
the covered parts, and do not store anything
under the seats.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up on the
cover latch, located at the end of the fuse block,
near the battery cable.
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release
the front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of
the vehicle.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
CAUTION: (Continued)
If the safety belt has not been routed through
the seat cushion at all, it will not be there to
work for the next passenger. The person
sitting in that position could be badly injured.
After reinstalling the seat cushion, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper slots
in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts
get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly routed
through the seat cushion or is twisted will
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Right Park Lamp
1
2
3
Fuel Pump
4
Left Park Lamp
Engine Control Module (ECM)/
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
5
Run 3 - Rear Blower
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Memory Module
Fuses
Usage
6
7
8
9
24
Electronic Leveling Control Module
Right Park Lamp (optional)
Steering Wheel Illumination
Front Heated/Cooled Seat Module
Body Control Module
(Left Turn Signal)
25
26
Cigarette Lighter,
Auxiliary Power Outlet
Run 2 - Heated/Cooled Seats,
Heated Washer Fluid
27
28
29
30
31
Navigation
10
Retained Accessory Power 1 (RAP)
Passenger Door Module
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Accessory Power Outlets
11
12
13
14
15
Rear Heated Seat Module
RPA Module
PASS-Key® III System
Unlock/Lock Module
Magnetic Ride Control
Body Control Module (BCM)
(Inadvertent)
32
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
(optional)
33
34
35
Retained Accessory Power 2 (RAP)
CanisterVent Solenoid
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Sunroof
Body Control Module (Courtesy)
Body Control Module (BCM) Dim
Body Control Module (BCM)
Run 1-Heated Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
Body Control Module
(Right Turn Signal)
36
37
38
39
40
Trunk Release
Amplifier, Radio
Driver Door Module
Rear Lumbar
Body Control Module (CHMSL)
Body Control Module
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
41
Usage
Stoplamp (optional)
Relays
59
Usage
Fuel Pump
42
OnStar® Module
60
License Plate Lamp (optional)
43
Body Modules
61
Right Park Lamp (optional)
44
Radio
62
Unlock
Lock
45
Door Unlatch (optional)
Rear Defogger (J-Case)
63
46
64
Run
Electronic Leveling Control
Compressor (J-Case)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
(optional)
47
65
48
49
Blower (J-Case) (optional)
Blower (J-Case) (optional)
66
67
68
69
70
Door Unlatch (optional)
Trunk Release
Stoplamp (optional)
Resistor
Usage
Overhead Lamps (optional)
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
50
Terminating Resistor
Relays
51
Usage
Front Blower (optional)
Rear Defogger
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Right Front Seat
54
55
56
57
52
Left Front Power Seat
Power Windows
Electronic Leveling Control
Compressor
53
58
Park Lamps
Power Tilt Steering Wheel
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution
label located under the hood. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
12.6 qt
7.5 qt
12.0 L
7.1 L
18.5 gal
7.0 qt
70.0 L
6.6 L
Transmission
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
4.6L DOHC V8
4.6L DOHC V8
Y
9
Automatic
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
Automatic
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of your
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures
“Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-10.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
✍ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
✍ Check engine coolant and windshield washer
fluid levels and add fluid as needed.
✍ Perform any needed additional services.
See “Additional Required Services” in this section.
✍ Inspect suspension and steering components.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, the following services, checks, and inspections
are required:
See footnote (b).
✍ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
✍ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
✍ Inspect restraint system components.
See footnote (e).
✍ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
✍ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
See footnote (k).
✍ Check transmission fluid level and add fluid
✍ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
See footnote (m).
as needed.
✍ Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear.
“Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-10.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
on page 5-18.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace passenger compartment
air filter. See footnote (g).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
•
Except Professional Vehicle: Engine
cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (j).
•
Professional Vehicle Only: Engine
cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (j).
•
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the hood, rear
compartment, glove box door, and console door.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-92 for more information.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Professional vehicle uses, such as limousine
service.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-22.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
page 5-58. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-66.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
on page 2-30.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Power Steering
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Engine Oil
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-22.
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and
Door Hinges
Engine Coolant
Weatherstrip Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake
System
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Windshield
Washer
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
Engine Oil Filter
GM Part Number
22676970
ACDelco® Part Number
A1627C
PF61
89017342
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
25689297
CF118C
41–987
12571535
Wiper Blade
21.7 in (55.0 cm)
Driver’s Side
10374585
10374586
—
—
Passenger’s Side
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE (United States Owners): Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006.
In Canada, contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge
and your case will generally be heard within 40 days.
If you do not agree with the decision given in your case,
you may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the
following address. Your inquiry should be accompanied
by your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after the following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two. General Motors of
Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge mediation/Arbitration
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.Cadillac.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, for safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will
not be provided through this service.
As the owner of a new Cadillac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Cadillac Roadside
Service® program.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
Who Is Covered?
Roadside Service coverage is for the vehicle operator,
regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not
eligible for coverage.
identification before lock-out service is provided.
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100. These services are
provided at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no longer
within the Powertrain warranty.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your
Cadillac Powertrain Warranty — 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km).
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac
Roadside Service will send you detailed, computer
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along with
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests will
be limited to six per calendar year.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car
towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each technician
travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete
with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to
handle most roadside repairs.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the
60 months/100,000 miles (160 000 km) warranty
period. Items covered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times when Roadside Service cannot provide timely
assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Cadillac Roadside Service®.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside Service
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage
are towing or services for vehicles operated on a
non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Roadside Service is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Service program at any time without
notification.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please
see your dealer for the maximum number of days
allowed and the allowance per rental day. Rental
reimbursement must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or
Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repair Facility
If a Crash Occurs
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians
and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Service Bulletins
For Credit Card Orders Only
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Owner Information
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance,
to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and
deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped,
to provide antilock braking to help the driver control
the vehicle. These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature settings.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe to the
OnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar®
Terms and Conditions for information on data collection
this manual for more information.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lamps (cont.)
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-23
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-93
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light ................................................. 3-66
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
Valet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-18
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|